Operating Manual

TOPS 
Traffic Operations and Planning Software
for Quixote Automatic Data Recorders

4/14/2005
p/n: 99-289 Rev 2D
Copyright © 2005 Quixote Traffic Corporation.
All rights reserved.

Information furnished by Quixote is believed to be accurate and reliable, however Quixote does not
warranty the accuracy, completeness, or fitness for use of any of the information furnished. No license is
granted by implication or otherwise under any intellectual property. Quixote reserves the right to alter any
of the Company's products or published technical data relating thereto at any time without notice.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or
via any electronic or mechanical means for any purpose other than the purchaser’s personal use without
the expressed, written permission of Quixote Traffic Corporation.

Quixote Traffic Corporation

2511 Corporate Way
Palmetto, FL 34221 U.S.A.

Trademarks
TOPS, SmartToll, ADR-6000, ADR-1000, ADR-2000, ADR-3000, CLMATS, Z-Link, and Zephyr are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Quixote Traffic Corporation, in the USA and other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Idris,™ Idris
Technology,™ and the Idris logo are registered trademarks of Diamond Consulting Services, Ltd. Other
brands and their products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders and should
be noted as such.

manual assembly: 81-897

manual content: 99-289
manual cover art: 99-290
 Contents

Preface — About This Manual......................................................................................... 1

Chapter 1 — Introduction to TOPS.................................................................................. 5
Chapter 2 — Managing Stations.................................................................................... 13
Chapter 3 — Working with Studies ............................................................................... 35
Chapter 4 — Managing TOPS Databases...................................................................... 45
Chapter 5 —Site Configuration ..................................................................................... 53
Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data ...................................................... 67
Chapter 7 — Configuring TOPS Operations ............................................................... 129
Chapter 8 — Working with an ADR-6000 in TOPS ...................................................... 135
Chapter 9 — TOPS Add-In: ADR Commander............................................................. 161
Chapter 10 — ADR Commander Add-In: Control Panel.............................................. 171
Chapter 11 — ADR Commander Add-In: ADR Monitor ............................................... 177
Chapter 12 — ADR Commander Add-In: Study Configuration ................................... 187
Chapter 13 — ADR Commander Add-In: Data Transfer .............................................. 195
Chapter 14 — TOPS Add-In: Autopolling Module ....................................................... 207
Chapter 15 — TOPS Add-in: File Backup.................................................................... 217
Chapter 16 — TOPS Add-in: Auto-Import ................................................................... 225
Chapter 17 — TOPS Add-in: TDP Station Import........................................................ 233
Chapter 18 — TOPS Add-in: ADR Class Tree Editor................................................... 245
Chapter 19 — TOPS Add-In: ADR Study Setup Wizard............................................... 257
Chapter 20 — Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 263
Glossary ...................................................................................................................... 271
Index ............................................................................................................................ 277

TOPS Operating Manual iii

Contents

Preface — About This Manual ............................................................................... 1

Purpose and Scope..................................................................................................................................... 1
Assumptions ................................................................................................................................................ 1
Related Documents..................................................................................................................................... 1
Technical Assistance .................................................................................................................................. 2
Conventions Used in this Manual ............................................................................................................... 3
Typographic Conventions .................................................................................................................... 3
Keyboard and Menu Conventions ....................................................................................................... 3
Symbol Conventions ............................................................................................................................ 4
Chapter 1 — Introduction to TOPS........................................................................ 5
Overview...................................................................................................................................................... 6
Introduction to the TOPS Modules ............................................................................................................. 6
Key Concepts in the Usage of TOPS ......................................................................................................... 7
Tour of TOPS .............................................................................................................................................. 9
Step 1: Downloading Data from a Data Recorder............................................................................... 9
Step 2: Importing Data into the TOPS Database ................................................................................ 9
Step 3: Selecting a Station................................................................................................................. 10
Step 4: Selecting a Study and a Data Range.................................................................................... 10
Step 5: Generating a Report .............................................................................................................. 10
Step 6: Exporting Data ....................................................................................................................... 12
Chapter 2 — Managing Stations.......................................................................... 13
Using Station View .................................................................................................................................... 14
What are Stations? ............................................................................................................................. 14
What is a Site?.................................................................................................................................... 14
Purpose of Each Station View Column.............................................................................................. 14
Editing Stations ......................................................................................................................................... 16
Adding a Station to the Database...................................................................................................... 16
Deleting a Station ............................................................................................................................... 17
Editing Station Data............................................................................................................................ 17
Selecting Multiple Items ..................................................................................................................... 17
Configuring Station Communications ....................................................................................................... 18
Connecting to a Station ...................................................................................................................... 18
Entering Local Connection Properties for a Station .......................................................................... 19
Entering Modem Connection Properties for a Station....................................................................... 20
Setting Modem as Default in the Comms Toolbar ............................................................................ 20
Setting Local as Default in the Comms Toolbar ................................................................................ 20
Adding Modem Dial-out Location....................................................................................................... 21
Changing Modem Dial-out Information .............................................................................................. 22
Adding Calling Card Information ........................................................................................................ 23
Difficulty Configuring a Field Modem ................................................................................................. 25
Modifying Station View.............................................................................................................................. 27
Grid Properties.................................................................................................................................... 27
Hiding Columns .................................................................................................................................. 27
Viewing Columns ................................................................................................................................ 27
Adjusting Column Size ....................................................................................................................... 27
Changing the Order of Columns ........................................................................................................ 28
Using Station Filters .................................................................................................................................. 29
Filtering Stations by Text.................................................................................................................... 29
Filtering Stations by Data ................................................................................................................... 30
Turning Off the Station Filter .............................................................................................................. 31
Filter Examples ................................................................................................................................... 31
Chapter 3 — Working with Studies...................................................................... 35
Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 36
Data Explorer - Study View ................................................................................................................ 36

iv TOPS Operating Manual

 Contents

Data Explorer - Calendar View ...........................................................................................................36

Study View Columns ...........................................................................................................................37
Moving/Changing a Study...................................................................................................................37
Deleting a Study from a Station ..........................................................................................................38
Using Study Filters.....................................................................................................................................39
Downloading and Importing Data..............................................................................................................40
Activating the Data Transfer Module ..................................................................................................40
Downloading Data Using a Modem ....................................................................................................41
Importing Data.....................................................................................................................................41
Chapter 4 — Managing TOPS Databases.............................................................45
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................46
Working With TOPS Databases ................................................................................................................47
Opening a Database ...........................................................................................................................47
Closing a Database.............................................................................................................................47
Creating a New Database...................................................................................................................47
Managing Data...........................................................................................................................................48
Importing Data Manually.....................................................................................................................48
Importing Data Automatically..............................................................................................................48
Reducing the Amount of Visible Data.................................................................................................49
Database Maintenance..............................................................................................................................50
Backup a Database.............................................................................................................................50
Compacting and Repairing Databases...............................................................................................50
Updating the database version ...........................................................................................................51
Chapter 5 —Site Configuration ............................................................................53
Managing Site Layout ................................................................................................................................54
Editing Site Layout Data .....................................................................................................................54
Updating Site Information in a Time/Date Range ..............................................................................55
Deleting a Site Layout .........................................................................................................................56
Working With Channel Maps .....................................................................................................................57
Using the Channel Map Editor............................................................................................................57
Change the Lane of a Channel...........................................................................................................57
Editing Channels Within a Date Range..............................................................................................58
Working With Array Maps ..........................................................................................................................60
Using the Array Map Editor.................................................................................................................60
Updating Array Flow Data...................................................................................................................61
Changing the Lane Assigned to a Flow .............................................................................................62
Editing Array Flow Within a Date Range............................................................................................62
Working With Lane Selection ....................................................................................................................64
Inserting Lane Direction Information ..................................................................................................64
Changing the Lane Assigned to a Channel........................................................................................64
Changing the Lane Assigned to a Flow .............................................................................................65
Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data.............................................67
Introduction to Report Creation in TOPS ..................................................................................................68
Creating Reports .................................................................................................................................68
Selecting Data and Generating a Report ...........................................................................................69
Deciding How to Output a Report.......................................................................................................69
Using the Report Wizard ...........................................................................................................................71
Selecting a Default Report Wizard .....................................................................................................71
Formatting Reports ....................................................................................................................................72
Modifying the Report Header..............................................................................................................72
Selecting a Default Font for Reports ..................................................................................................74
Formatting Report Labels ...................................................................................................................74
Modifying Row & Column Headings ...................................................................................................76
Updating the Printing Options of a Report .........................................................................................77

TOPS Operating Manual v

Contents

Creating BIN Reports ................................................................................................................................ 78

Setting Up a Class Report.................................................................................................................. 79
Setting up a Gap Report..................................................................................................................... 83
Setting up a Headway Report ............................................................................................................ 87
Setting up a Length Report ................................................................................................................ 91
Setting Up a Speed Report ................................................................................................................ 95
Setting up a Volume Report ............................................................................................................... 99
Setting up a Multi-Dimensional Report ............................................................................................ 105
Creating PVR Reports ............................................................................................................................ 107
Setting Up an Individual PVR Records Report................................................................................ 108
Setting up a PVR Stats Report ........................................................................................................ 109
Setting up a PVR - ESALs by Class by Hour Report ...................................................................... 110
Setting up a PVR Auto Calibration Factor Report ........................................................................... 111
Setting up a PVR Weekly GVW Report ........................................................................................... 112
Setting up a PVR Hourly GVW Report ............................................................................................ 113
Setting up a GVW Summary Report................................................................................................ 114
Setting up a PVR Weight Violations Report .................................................................................... 115
Setting up a PVR Weight Violations by Class Report ..................................................................... 116
Setting up a PVR Weight Violations Summary Report ................................................................... 117
Configuration Screens for PVR Reports ................................................................................................ 118
Default Units Tab .............................................................................................................................. 118
Classes Tab ...................................................................................................................................... 118
Display Settings Tab ........................................................................................................................ 118
Field Selection Tab ........................................................................................................................... 119
Status Filters Tab ............................................................................................................................. 120
Violation filters Tab ........................................................................................................................... 120
Filter Definitions Tab ........................................................................................................................ 121
ESAL Settings Tab ........................................................................................................................... 122
Exporting Data......................................................................................................................................... 123
Generating an Export ....................................................................................................................... 123
Export Options .................................................................................................................................. 124
Generating PRN Exports of All New Data ....................................................................................... 127
Additional Information about Exports............................................................................................... 127
Chapter 7 — Configuring TOPS Operations ..................................................... 129
Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 130
Showing/Hiding the Introduction Screen ................................................................................................ 130
Configuring Exit Confirmation ................................................................................................................. 130
Enabling Filters When Starting TOPS .................................................................................................... 131
Importing Data Automatically.................................................................................................................. 131
Selecting the Default Wizard .................................................................................................................. 131
Selecting the Report Label Format......................................................................................................... 132
Changing Agency and User Names on Reports .................................................................................... 132
Selecting Measurement Units................................................................................................................. 133
Using the Add-In Manager ...................................................................................................................... 134
Chapter 8 — Working with an ADR-6000 in TOPS ............................................ 135
Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 136
Launching TOPS to Access an ADR-6000...................................................................................... 136
Connecting to an ADR-6000 Through TOPS......................................................................................... 137
Direct Connect vs. Modem Connect ................................................................................................ 137
Creating a New ADR-6000 Station in TOPS ................................................................................... 138
Connecting to an Existing ADR-6000 Station in TOPS................................................................... 141
Creating a Study for the ADR-6000........................................................................................................ 142
Introduction to Study Configuration ................................................................................................. 142
Using the Study Configuration Interface.......................................................................................... 143
To Add a Study to an ADR6000....................................................................................................... 149

vi TOPS Operating Manual

 Contents

Downloading a Study to the ADR-6000 ..................................................................................................153

Monitoring the Activity of an ADR-6000 ..................................................................................................154
Retrieving Data from an ADR-6000 ........................................................................................................156
Understanding Data Transfer Properties .........................................................................................158
ADR6000 Support in the ADR Monitor ...................................................................................................159
Monitor Screen for the ADR6000 .....................................................................................................159
ADR6000 Filter Settings ...................................................................................................................160
Chapter 9 — TOPS Add-In: ADR Commander ...................................................161
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................162
Launching the ADR Commander......................................................................................................162
Using the ADR Commander Interface ....................................................................................................163
Menus ................................................................................................................................................164
Toolbars.............................................................................................................................................164
Status Bar..........................................................................................................................................165
Connection Properties .............................................................................................................................166
Local/Modem Selection.....................................................................................................................166
Local Connection Properties.............................................................................................................166
Modem Connection Properties .........................................................................................................168
ADR Commander Options .......................................................................................................................169
ADR Commander Options ................................................................................................................169
Selecting a Add-in .............................................................................................................................169
Chapter 10 — ADR Commander Add-In: Control Panel ....................................171
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................172
Using the Control Panel Interface ...........................................................................................................173
Activating the Control Panel .............................................................................................................173
Mouse Operation...............................................................................................................................173
Keyboard Operation ..........................................................................................................................173
Troubleshooting the ADR Control Panel.................................................................................................175
ADR Not Responding........................................................................................................................175
Telemetry Contact.............................................................................................................................175
Main Screen reset .............................................................................................................................175
Chapter 11 — ADR Commander Add-In: ADR Monitor......................................177
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................178
Using the ADR Monitor Interface ............................................................................................................179
Monitor Selection Table ....................................................................................................................179
Sensor/Array Table ...........................................................................................................................181
Event Data View................................................................................................................................183
Working With Log Files in ADR Monitor..................................................................................................184
What gets written to the log file? ......................................................................................................184
Creating a Log File............................................................................................................................184
Closing a Log File .............................................................................................................................184
Refreshing the Sensor / Array View ........................................................................................................185
Chapter 12 — ADR Commander Add-In: Study Configuration .........................187
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................188
Using the Study Configuration Interface.................................................................................................189
Study Configuration Summary Screen .............................................................................................189
Study Config Details Screen .............................................................................................................190
Configuring Studies in the Summary Screen..........................................................................................191
Adding a Study ..................................................................................................................................191
Deleting a Study ................................................................................................................................191
Editing a Study ..................................................................................................................................191
Loading Study Configurations from Disk..........................................................................................191
Saving Study Configurations to Disk................................................................................................191
Getting Current Study Configuration(s) from a Remote Unit...........................................................191

TOPS Operating Manual vii

Contents

Sending Study Configurations to a Remote Unit............................................................................. 192

Configuring Study Details ....................................................................................................................... 193
Modifying a Heading......................................................................................................................... 193
Deleting the Study ............................................................................................................................ 193
Editing Study Headings .................................................................................................................... 193
Chapter 13 — ADR Commander Add-In: Data Transfer.................................... 195
Introduction.............................................................................................................................................. 196
Using Data Transfer - An Overview ................................................................................................. 196
Using the Data Transfer Interface .......................................................................................................... 197
Refreshing the Display ..................................................................................................................... 197
Data Transfer Menus........................................................................................................................ 198
Data Transfer Toolbar ...................................................................................................................... 201
Data Transfer Status Bar ................................................................................................................. 201
Setting the Connection Properties .......................................................................................................... 202
Setting Connection and Device Type .............................................................................................. 202
Direct (RS232) Connection Properties ............................................................................................ 203
Modem Connection Properties ........................................................................................................ 203
Configuring Data Transfer....................................................................................................................... 205
File Download Options ..................................................................................................................... 205
Connection/File Listing Options ....................................................................................................... 206
Current/Selected files ....................................................................................................................... 206
Chapter 14 — TOPS Add-In: Autopolling Module............................................. 207
Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 208
Enabling and Disabling Autopolling ................................................................................................. 208
Configuring Polling Groups ..................................................................................................................... 209
Date and Time Tab ........................................................................................................................... 209
Operations Tab ................................................................................................................................. 210
Creating an Autopoll Group.............................................................................................................. 211
Setting the Time and Day to Poll ..................................................................................................... 213
Removing an Autopoll Group........................................................................................................... 213
Changing the Name of an Autopoll Group....................................................................................... 214
Configuring Autopolling........................................................................................................................... 215
Selecting a Modem for Autopoll ....................................................................................................... 215
Setting the Autopoll Download Directory......................................................................................... 216
Chapter 15 — TOPS Add-in: File Backup.......................................................... 217
Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 218
How the Backup Utility Works .......................................................................................................... 218
How TOPS moves the files .............................................................................................................. 218
Activating/Deactivating File Backup ....................................................................................................... 219
Loading the File Backup Add-in ....................................................................................................... 219
Enabling File Backup........................................................................................................................ 219
Disabling File backup ....................................................................................................................... 220
Configuring File Backup Operation......................................................................................................... 221
Using the Backup Directory Designer .............................................................................................. 221
Chapter 16 — TOPS Add-in: Auto-Import ......................................................... 225
Overview of Auto-import ......................................................................................................................... 226
Configuring Auto-Import.......................................................................................................................... 228
Support for the new IQData AutoPoller ........................................................................................... 229
File Access Rights to Support Auto-Import ............................................................................................ 229
Folders on the Local Machine.......................................................................................................... 230
Folders Across a Network................................................................................................................ 230

viii TOPS Operating Manual

 Contents

Importance of FileBackup to Auto-Import ...............................................................................................231

Auto-Import and Multiple Databases.......................................................................................................231
Chapter 17 — TOPS Add-in: TDP Station Import...............................................233
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................234
TOPS versus TDP Stations ..............................................................................................................234
Launching the TDP import Wizard....................................................................................................235
Enabling and Disabling the TDP Import..................................................................................................236
Using the TDP Import Wizard..................................................................................................................237
Wizard Directory Settings Screen.....................................................................................................237
Wizard File Selections Screen..........................................................................................................237
Wizard Review Screen......................................................................................................................239
Processing the selected files ...................................................................................................................241
Import Review Screen.......................................................................................................................241
Contents of the Station Import Log...................................................................................................242
After You Import ................................................................................................................................243
Chapter 18 — TOPS Add-in: ADR Class Tree Editor.........................................245
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................246
Launching the Class Tree Editor ......................................................................................................247
Using the Class Tree Editor Interface .....................................................................................................248
Menus ................................................................................................................................................249
Definition Menu .................................................................................................................................250
Options Menu ....................................................................................................................................250
Using the Vehicle Definition Window................................................................................................252
Editing a Class Tree ................................................................................................................................253
Adding a Vehicle Definition ...............................................................................................................253
Editing a Vehicle Definition ...............................................................................................................254
Deleting a Vehicle Definition.............................................................................................................254
Managing Class Trees .............................................................................................................................255
Saving Classification Data ................................................................................................................255
Saving Classification Data with a New Name ..................................................................................255
Uploading Classification Data...........................................................................................................255
Printing Classification Definitions .....................................................................................................255
Updating a Trees Name and Description .........................................................................................255
Configuring the Tree Editor .....................................................................................................................256
Setting the Default Method of Measurement ...................................................................................256
Setting the Default Method of Weight...............................................................................................256
Selecting Feet or Meters for Length Measurements........................................................................256
Selecting KIPS or Tonnes for Weight Measurements .....................................................................256
Chapter 19 — TOPS Add-In: ADR Study Setup Wizard .....................................257
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................258
Launching the ADR Study Setup Wizard .........................................................................................258
Using the ADR Study Setup Wizard........................................................................................................259
Selecting an ADR Type.....................................................................................................................259
Selecting the Number of Detectors...................................................................................................259
Setting a Site ID and Station Number ..............................................................................................260
Selecting an Array Type....................................................................................................................260
Specifying Study Details ...................................................................................................................260
Setting a Study Name and Filename................................................................................................260
Completing the Setup File.................................................................................................................261
Chapter 20 — Troubleshooting ..........................................................................263
TOPS Error Messages.............................................................................................................................264
Sending an Error File to Peek...........................................................................................................264
Understanding the TOPS Message Log .................................................................................................265
Viewing a Message Log....................................................................................................................265

TOPS Operating Manual ix

Contents

Some Typical Error Conditions ............................................................................................................... 267

Error-Check Connection................................................................................................................... 267
Overlapping Data.............................................................................................................................. 267
Report Headings are Not What I Expected ..................................................................................... 268
Printed Report is Missing Characters .............................................................................................. 268
Printed Report Header is Too Close to the Data............................................................................. 268
Directions Within Report are Incorrect............................................................................................. 269
Unable to Generate a PVR Report .................................................................................................. 269
Glossary ............................................................................................................. 271
Index ................................................................................................................... 277

x TOPS Operating Manual

 Contents

Table of Figures

Figure 1 – Introduction to the TOPS modules........................................................................ 6

Figure 2 – Array Map Editor window ....................................................................................60
Figure 3 – TOPS modules - Reports and Exports are in blue................................................68
Figure 4 – Header Editing Window ......................................................................................72
Figure 5 – Report Labels tab in Options window ..................................................................75
Figure 6 – Multi-dimensional Report Wizard window ..........................................................105
Figure 7 – Export Wizard window ......................................................................................123
Figure 8 – Export Options window .....................................................................................125
Figure 9 – TOPS Options screen.......................................................................................130
Figure 10 – Agency and Registered User name settings for reports....................................132
Figure 11 —Parameters for a modem connection to an ADR-6000.....................................139
Figure 12 —Parameters for a local connection to an ADR-6000 .........................................139
Figure 13 — ADR-6000 device connection options in TOPS...............................................140
Figure 14 — ADR-6000 device connection options in TOPS...............................................141
Figure 15 — ADR Commander Summary Screen ..............................................................143
Figure 16 —Typical Study Details window .........................................................................145
Figure 17 — Typical Heading Editing dialog box ................................................................146
Figure 19 — Then set the second......................................................................................147
Figure 20 — Launch the ADR Commander from within TOPS ............................................149
Figure 21 — Study Configuration Summary window...........................................................150
Figure 22 — Study Details window ....................................................................................151
Figure 23 — Heading 1 edit dialog box..............................................................................151

TOPS Operating Manual xi

Figure 24 — A typical set of study headings ......................................................................152
Figure 25 — Launch the ADR Commander from within TOPS............................................153
Figure 26 — Launch the ADR Commander from within TOPS............................................154
Figure 27 — ADR-6000 Monitor window............................................................................154
Figure 28 — Filtering dialog box in ADR Commander’s Monitor .........................................155
Figure 29 — TOPS Options dialog box..............................................................................156
Figure 30 — Retrieve files from the device using the Comms tools.....................................157
Figure 31 — TOPS’ Data Transfer Parameters..................................................................158
Figure 32 — Current File retrieval settings.........................................................................158
Figure 33 – Monitor Screen connected to an ADR-6000.....................................................159
Figure 34 – Filter settings in ADR Commander for an ADR-6000........................................160
Figure 35 – ADR Commander Interface.............................................................................163
Figure 36 – Connection Toolbar ........................................................................................164
Figure 37 – Unit Status Toolbar.........................................................................................165
Figure 38 – Selected Add-in Toolbar .................................................................................165
Figure 39 – Local Connection Properties window...............................................................166
Figure 40 – Modem Connection Properties........................................................................168
Figure 41 – Basic Control Panel interface..........................................................................172
Figure 42 – ADR Control Panel add-in with display on .......................................................173
Figure 43 – ADR Commander with ADR Monitor loaded ....................................................178
Figure 44 – Interface of the ADR Monitor...........................................................................179
Figure 45 – Monitor Selection portion of ADR Monitor........................................................180
Figure 46 – Array View .....................................................................................................181
Figure 47 – Sensor Count View.........................................................................................181
Figure 48 – Event Data display in ADR Monitor .................................................................183
Figure 49 – Study Configuration Summary screen .............................................................189
Figure 50 – Study Configuration Details screen .................................................................190
Figure 51 – Dialog box to edit study headings....................................................................193
Figure 52 – User interface for the Data Transfer module ....................................................197
Figure 53 – Selecting a data transfer directory...................................................................199
Figure 54 – Data Transfer Edit menu.................................................................................199
Figure 55 – Data Transfer View menu ...............................................................................199
Figure 56 – Data Transfer Connection menu .....................................................................200
Figure 57 – Data Transfer Help menu................................................................................200
Figure 58 – Data Transfer module toolbars........................................................................201
Figure 59 – Purpose of the Data Transfer toolbar buttons ..................................................201

xii TOPS Operating Manual

 Contents

Figure 60 – Connection type selection in Data Transfer......................................................202

Figure 61 – Direct connection properties............................................................................203
Figure 62 – Modem connection properties .........................................................................204
Figure 63 – Data Transfer Options window ........................................................................205
Figure 64 – AutoPolling buttons.........................................................................................208
Figure 65 – Edit Autopoll Group dialog box........................................................................209
Figure 66 – Operations tab of the Edit Autopoll Group dialog box .......................................210
Figure 67 – Autopoll Options dialog box ............................................................................215
Figure 68 – Backup Directory Designer window .................................................................221
Figure 69 – Setting a base directory for File Backup ..........................................................222
Figure 70 – Auto-Import module during installation.............................................................226
Figure 71 –Auto-Import in the Add-In Manager ..................................................................227
Figure 72 – Auto-Import Options screen ............................................................................228
Figure 73 – Autopolling module of IQData .........................................................................229
Figure 74 – Directory Settings screen................................................................................237
Figure 75 – File Selections screen.....................................................................................238
Figure 76 – Review of TDP Import settings........................................................................239
Figure 77 – Import Review screen.....................................................................................241
Figure 78 – ADR Class Tree Editor window .......................................................................246
Figure 79 – Class Tree Editor window ...............................................................................248
Figure 80 – File menu .......................................................................................................249
Figure 81 – Definition menu of the Class Tree Editor..........................................................250
Figure 82 – Options menu of the Class Tree Editor............................................................250
Figure 83 – Help menu of the Class Tree Editor.................................................................251
Figure 84 – Vehicle Definition window ...............................................................................252
Figure 85 – Flowchart of the ADR Study Setup Wizard.......................................................259
Figure 86 – TOPS Program Error window..........................................................................264
Figure 87 – Message Log window .....................................................................................265

TOPS Operating Manual xiii

xiv TOPS Operating Manual
 Preface — About This Manual

PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This manual introduces and discusses the TOPS traffic operations and planning
software from Quixote Traffic Corporation. TOPS is a suite of software modules used
to manage the data generated by the Quixote Traffic ADR line of automatic data
recorders. The book describes how to configure, operate, and troubleshoot the
software. It also touches upon aspects of ADR operation, particularly in the areas of
communications and data management. However, for more detail about these
hardware products, or the Z-Link software utilities, refer to the manuals for those
products, as listed in Related Documents below.

ASSUMPTIONS
It is assumed that the reader and user of this manual and the software and hardware
described herein, are authorized to work in and around ADR data recorders by the
local traffic governing body. The reader should be familiar with the operation of ADR
devices in field settings. In particular, the reader is assumed to be aware of, and
actively following, all safety and security protocols of the local traffic agency.

RELATED DOCUMENTS
These documents provide additional information which may be useful when working
with TOPS, and the hardware and additional software that may be required when
using TOPS:
Table 1 – Documentation related to the TOPS software Suite
Document Part Number
TOPS Installation Manual 81-896
TOPS Release Notes 99-291
Tech Note: Resetting User Preferences in TOPS 99-372

TOPS Operating Manual 1

Preface — About This Manual

Document Part Number

ADR-1000/ADR-2000 Getting Started Guide 119c507
ADR Plus Series Operating Manual 99-133
ADR Modem Setup Tech Note 99-363
ADR Firmware Release Notes - v5.3 International English 99-350
ADR Firmware Release Notes - v5.3 American/Spanish 99-351
ADR Firmware Release Notes - v5.3 International 99-349
ADR Firmware Release Notes - v1.3.5 StopWatch 99-348
ADR Firmware Release Notes - v4.6 American English 99-194
ADR Firmware Release Notes - v4.6 Am English/French Canadian 99-337
ADR Firmware Release Notes - v4.6 Am English/Spanish 99-336
ADR Firmware Release Notes - v4.6 International English 99-335
ADR-6000 Installation Manual 81-894
ADR-6000 Operating Manual 81-895
ADR-6000 Site Preparation Manual 81-893
Z-Link Release Notes 99-387
Z-Link Installation Manual 81-1007
Z-Link Operating Manual 81-932

TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
If you need assistance or have questions related to the use of this product,
call Quixote Traffic Corporation’s Customer Service Group for support.

Contact Information Hours of Operation

Toll free in the U.S.: (800) 245-7660 M-F, 8am-5pm, EST
phone: (941) 845-1200
fax: (941) 845-1504
email: [email protected]

2 TOPS Operating Manual

 Conventions Used in this Manual

CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL

When referring to any of the product manuals from Quixote Traffic, the following
typographical conventions will aid in understanding the intent of the various topics
and procedures.

Typographic Conventions
As shown in the following table, whenever text appears in the following fonts and
styles, it indicates a special situation or meaning for the user.
Table 2 — Typographic conventions used in this manual
Description Example
Commands or controls that must be In the Print dialog box, select Options.
selected by the user appear in bold.
Switches or keyboard keys appear in When finished selecting parameters, press
SMALL CAPS . the PAGEDOWN key.
Things that the user needs to type at a Type a:\setup.exe at the prompt.
prompt or entry window exactly as
shown appear in this font.
Items italicized inside slanted brackets Type c:\<install
< > are variables that need to be directory>\product and press
replaced while typing a command. The ENTER.
slanted brackets should not be typed.

Keyboard and Menu Conventions

Some commands are accomplished with a pair or sequence of keystrokes or
command entries. The way these should be done is indicated by the way they are
shown in the instructions, as listed here.
Table 3 —Keyboard conventions used in this manual
Description Example
A series of commands that need to be Go to Start Programs CL-MATS and
completed in sequence will be select Configuration.
separated by a right slant bracket (>)
A dash, or hyphen, ( - ) indicates keys Press CTRL-p to print the file.
or controls that need to be pressed at
the same time to activate the command
A comma ( , ) indicates keystrokes that To print the file, press ALT-f, p.
need to be pressed one after the other.

TOPS Operating Manual 3

Preface — About This Manual

Symbol Conventions
The following symbols are used in this manual to indicate special messages for the
user. Each indicates the level of importance that should be assigned to the
associated text.
Table 4 — Symbol conventions used in this manual
Symbol Description
Note — This icon accompanies a general note or tip about the current topic.
Caution — This icon represents a general hazard. If the operator is not
paying attention, some action that is undesired may occur.
Warning — This icon represents a situation where some real risk exists,
whether of electrical shock or some other form of personal or property
damage. Be very careful when dealing with Warning situations.

4 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 1 — Introduction to TOPS

This section explains the basic purpose and functionality of the TOPS software system. The
following topics are discussed in detail in this chapter:

• An overview of the TOPS modules, on page 6.

• Key concepts to understand when using TOPS, on page 7.
• A tour of the basic TOPS interface, on page 9.

TOPS Operating Manual 5

Chapter 1 — Introduction to TOPS

OVERVIEW
Welcome to Quixote’s Traffic Operations & Planning Software, the intelligent choice
for traffic data collection and processing. You are encouraged to view a step-by-step
tour of the main features of TOPS. These steps are intended to familiarize you with
the software and to demonstrate some of the advanced features it contains.
Or for another way to view this information, you can open the TOPS help system and
use the Contents tree, the Index, and the navigation buttons to browse through the
topics.

INTRODUCTION TO THE TOPS MODULES

This diagram shows the way that the TOPS modules work together. The primary flow
when working with TOPS goes from the left to right of this illustration along the main
axis. Other optional modules can be accessed (if present) in order to manage stations
and studies, gather data, and view the results.

Figure 1 – Introduction to the TOPS modules

6 TOPS Operating Manual

 Key Concepts in the Usage of TOPS

KEY CONCEPTS IN THE USAGE OF TOPS

These are some common, and commonly misunderstood, terms that are important to
the operation of TOPS and ADR units.

Steps in the Processing of ADR Data

Upload -- The process of sending files to an ADR unit, either out in the field via
modem, or directly connected by a serial cable to the TOPS computer. Typically, only
setup files are 'uploaded.’
Download -- The retrieval of data files from one or more ADR units back to the TOPS
computer. The information is then stored as either Bin or PVR files on the local
computer, and then pulled into the TOPS database.
Process -- This is what happens to the ADR data after it has been downloaded to the
TOPS computer. This includes importing it into TOPS, checking and analyzing the
data, and generating reports based on the information.
Export -- After the data has been processed in TOPS, it can, at the user's discretion,
be exported to a variety of output formats. ADR data can be exported as Excel
spreadsheet data, into TMG report formats, or into .PRN files.

Components of the Data Gathering System

ADR Products -- The line of automatic data recording units, built by Quixote Traffic
for the traffic industry to record data about traffic flow and composition. Composed of
the ADR-1000 and ADR-2000 boxed devices, and the ADR-3000 rack-mounted
device, as well as their Plus variants.
Idris Products -- These are more powerful ADR units that use the licensed Idris
technology to gather more information about each vehicle. The SmartToll, ADR-6000
and ADR-4000 products are part of the Idris product line, but only the ADR-6000 can
be used with TOPS.
Plus Products -- These are newer versions of the ADR Product line that include
more memory and slight modifications of the ADR hardware. They use the same
firmware and setup files as regular ADR units, but can store more study data.
ADR-1000 Plus, ADR-2000 Plus, and ADR-3000 Plus units will work with TOPS.
TOPS -- Traffic Operations and Planning Software. This software suite is intended to
make the handling of ADR setup and data files easier and more consistent.
TDP -- A DOS-based software package that can be used with Quixote’s ADR and 241
units. Its full name was ‘Traffic Data Processor-Autopoll Telemetry and Report
Generator’. The precursor to TOPS. No longer supplied to customers as a separate
product, however it is still included with the TOPS install. Uses a different database
storage format than TOPS, which is why there is a TDP Import Wizard provided with
TOPS, for anyone that wants to convert their TDP data to the TOPS format.

TOPS Operating Manual 7

Chapter 1 — Introduction to TOPS

Types of Files used by TOPS and ADRs

Setup files -- These are the files that hold study configuration information in an ADR
unit. When a study is configured with TOPS, it is stored to a Setup file before it is
'uploaded' to one or more ADR units. Setup files have the .stp extension.
Bin files -- These are binary files used to store the data results of studies on ADR
units. This is the older, more compact of the data storage formats, and typically only
includes summary information about the study itself and 'counts' of vehicles per
category. It does not store information about individual vehicles, as the PVR data files
do.
PVR files -- These are also binary files, but used to store a great deal more
information about traffic flow. Per Vehicle Record files store details about every
vehicle that passes the detection equipment. Often stored by studies configured for
the more advanced detection arrays and by the Idris products. PVR files can grow
very large, very quickly.
PRN files -- This is a space-delimited ASCII output file that was previously used by
241 detectors and could be read by the old TDP software package. It was originally
used to send data to serial printers. TOPS data can be exported to this file format, if
so desired, but the PRN file format has some limitations that are more strict than
some TOPS’ data. This means that some TOPS information cannot be represented in
a PRN file due to the limits on the maximum number of fields and maximum permitted
values that exist for certain fields in this file format.

Data Classification Within TOPS

New Data -- Data that is imported into TOPS is marked as ‘new’ when it is first
imported into the program. The ‘New’ marker is removed as soon as the data is
included in a report or export. Data retains its New status even when TOPS is shut
down and restarted.
Session Data -- This is data that has been imported into TOPS since the last time the
program was launched. Views can be filtered to show only session data, if the
operator only wants to see recent data, but does not wish to exclude data that has
already been included in a report or export file.

8 TOPS Operating Manual

 Tour of TOPS

TOUR OF TOPS

Step 1: Downloading Data from a Data Recorder

The Traffic Operations & Planning Software (TOPS) must have data in a database
before it can be used. You can download data files from a data recorder unit by
following these steps, or if you want to use the pre-loaded sample data that has been
provided in file tops_27.mdb, skip to the next step.

Download data files into TOPS

1. From the Comms toolbar, select the Type of Protocol from the drop-down list
(Peek ADR, Peek 241, or Peek Idris/ADR 6000).
2. Select the Type of Connection from the drop-down list (local or modem).
3. Click one of the buttons on the toolbar :
Read new files -- Download the new files only.
Read all files -- Download all the files.
Read selected files -- Download specific files only.

Step 2: Importing Data into the TOPS Database

If the Auto Import option is enabled, all files you have downloaded will automatically
be imported into the database; therefore, it is not necessary to manually import them
and you may continue on to Step 3.

Importing data into TOPS:

1. After the data files are downloaded, select File on the menu bar.
2. Select the Import from the drop-down menu.
3. Select one of the following options from the menu:

a.) Selected files -- [To download specific files only.] A dialog box appears that
allows you to select the ADR binned files to import. You may select multiple
files. Click the Open command button and the importing will begin.
b.) Directory Contents -- [To download all the files within one directory.]
Select the name of the directory you want to import. Click the OK
command button and the importing will begin.

Important If an invalid file is selected, TOPS will detect this and will not import it. It
is not necessary to select the kind of files you are importing. The file
type will be detected automatically and, if it is supported by TOPS, will
be imported.

TOPS Operating Manual 9

Chapter 1 — Introduction to TOPS

Step 3: Selecting a Station

1. Once the importing is complete, a list of the stations in the database are
displayed in the Data Explorer screen. Select the Station you want to work
with. Notice the Station you have selected is displayed in blue.
2. Click the Next command button to advance to the second page of the Data
Explorer.

Step 4: Selecting a Study and a Data Range

On the second page of the Data Explorer ~ Select Study view, you may select the
format to view the data:

When the Study View Tab is selected, a list of the Studies for the selected
Station(s) are displayed.
When the Calendar View Tab is selected, you may select data within specific
dates.
Once a minimum of one study or one day has been selected from the list displayed,
the Report Wizard and Export Wizard buttons are enabled on the toolbar. These
features allow you to generate a report or export.

Step 5: Generating a Report

Once the data is stored in the database, it can be analyzed in a variety of ways. The
most obvious method is to generate one of TOPS preconfigured Reports.

To produce a report
1. Click the Report Wizard button.
Or
Select File from the menu bar, select Report from the drop-down menu.
2. Review the instructions on the Report Wizard window. Click the Next
command button.
3. Select one or more of the reports listed.

Note To run the report without displaying the rest of the wizard or data, check the box
labeled "Run export in unattended mode". The default settings are applied and
the report is not displayed but sent directly to the printer.

10 TOPS Operating Manual

 Tour of TOPS

4. Click the Next command button to edit the options for the selected reports, if
applicable.
5. Click the Finish command button. The report will be generated and the results
are displayed.
You have three options (Save, Print, or Close) with the displayed report:
1. You may Save the report by selecting File from the menu bar.

Note You may save the report in the following formats: Excel 5/95,
Excel 97, Tabbed text, Tabbed text (data only), HTML, HTML
(data only), and Formula One. If saved in the HTML format,
only the current worksheet is saved, not the entire report.

2. Select Save As from the drop-down menu.

3. Enter the name of the file in the File Name field.
4. Select the appropriate Save As Type from the drop-down list.
5. Click the Save command button.
Or
1. You may Print the report by clicking the Print command button. You may
change the printing options of the report.
2. When the Print dialog box appears, ensure the Printer information is accurate.
3. Click the OK command button.
Or
1. Click the Close command button to return to the Data Explorer.

TOPS Operating Manual 11

Chapter 1 — Introduction to TOPS

Step 6: Exporting Data

Another option when analyzing the ADR data is to export the information to an
external file that can be imported into a third-party database, spreadsheet, or
database application.

To export the data

1. Click the Export Wizard button.
Or
1. Select File from the menu bar, select Export from the drop-down menu.
2. Review the instructions on the Export Wizard window. Click the Next
command button.
3. Select one or more of the export data types listed on the Select Export window.

Note To export the data without displaying the wizard or data, check
the box labeled "Run export in unattended mode". The default
settings are applied, the export is not displayed but sent directly
to the printer.

4. Click the Next command button to modify the options for the selected export, if
applicable.
5. Click the Finish command button.
6. Review the instruction on the Introduction Screen. Click the Next command
button.
7. You may modify the Output File settings. Click the Next command button.
8. To edit the information displayed, click the Back command button and edit the
options displayed.
Or
Click the Finish command button to export the data.

12 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 2 — Managing Stations

This section explains how to use TOPS to manage multiple data recorder stations in multiple
locations. The following topics are discussed in detail in this chapter:

• Using the TOPS Station View display, on page 14.

• How to edit station parameters within TOPS, on page 16.
• Configuring communications with stations, on page 18.
• Modifying the appearance of Station View, on page 27.
• Working with station filters, on page 29.

TOPS Operating Manual 13

Chapter 2 — Managing Stations

USING STATION VIEW

The Data Explorer - Station View screen displays the names of the Stations available
in the database. You may select one or more Stations to view at one time. You may
edit the site layout for a Station.

To select a Station
1. Select the row in the grid containing the Station’s data. Notice the row is
displayed in blue.
2. Click the Next command button to view the Studies for the Station.

What are Stations?

A Station is a phrase used to distinguish between pieces of data collection equipment
at the same physical location (or “Site”).

What is a Site?
A Site typically refers to the physical location of the traffic data collection equipment.
Some examples would be “Corner of Route 301 and Smith Road” or “M 25 Junction
14”. The Site and Station information are used to represent a single piece of data
collection equipment.
Under some circumstances, “Site” may not specify a single road or intersection. In
such cases, data collected from each station within the site is used to build a picture
of the traffic flow through the site.

Purpose of Each Station View Column

In the Data Explorer Station View window, there are numerous columns describing
the downloaded station. Most of the data displayed may be edited:
Double-click the row you want to update. The row in edit mode is displayed in
yellow and the text is bold.
Make the necessary changes.
Press the Enter key.

Column Heading Description

Site ID The Site identification number as recorded in the current database.
You may edit this information typing the updated data.
Station Number The Station Numbers available from the current database. You
may edit this information by typing in the updated data.
Station Name The name assigned to the Station.
Station Type The type of Station. You may edit this information by selecting a
different type from the drop-down list, or by typing in a new Type.

14 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using Station View

Column Heading Description

Type of Data The type of data downloaded into the database for this station.
This is displayed but disabled.
Type of Unit The type of automatic data recorder used to record the information.
You may edit this information by selecting a different type from the
drop-down list.
Connection The type of connection used to download the data for this Site and
Station. To update this information by placing your cursor in the
field while it is in edit mode, clicking the icon inside the field, and
updating the data displayed in the Connection Parameters dialog
box.
Autopoll Group The Autopoll group the Site and Station are assigned to. This is
displayed but disabled unless you the Autopoll add-in loaded.
Current ESN The Electronic Serial Number of the current recorder located at the
station. If the recording device changes, this information will
automatically be updated when the database is downloaded. This
is displayed but disabled.
City The city name the Station is located in. You may update this
information by: (1) clicking the down arrow and selecting the city
from the drop-down list or (2) typing in the updated information.
County The county the Station is located in. You may update this
information by: (1) clicking the down arrow and selecting the
county from the drop-down list or (2) typing in the updated
information.
State The state the Station is located in. You may update this
information by: (1) clicking the down arrow and selecting the state
from the drop-down list or (2) typing in the updated information.
Country The country the Station is located in. You may update this
information by: (1) clicking the down arrow and selecting the
country from the drop-down list or (2) typing in the updated
information.
Description A brief description defining the Site and Station. You may edit this
information by typing the updated data.

TOPS Operating Manual 15

Chapter 2 — Managing Stations

EDITING STATIONS

Adding a Station to the Database

There are three methods you may use to add a Station to a database:
1. Open the Data Explorer - Select Station screen.
2. Select Edit from the menu.
3. Select New Station from the drop-down menu. A new row appears at the
bottom of the grid box displayed in yellow for data entry to begin.

Caution You must enter a minimum of a Station Number and Site ID.

4. To accept the changes made, press the Enter key. To cancel the changes
made, press the Esc key; to exit from the edit mode, press the Enter key.
Or
1. Open the Data Explorer - Select Station screen.
2. Press the Insert key on your keyboard. A new row appears at the bottom of
the grid box displayed in yellow for data entry to begin.
3. To accept the changes made, press the Enter key. To cancel the changes
made, press the Esc key; to exit from the edit mode, press the Enter key.
Or
1. Open the Data Explorer - Select Station screen.
2. Place the cursor over the grid box, right-click your mouse. A popup menu
appears.
3. Select New Station from the menu. A new row appears at the bottom of the
grid box displayed in yellow for data entry to begin.
4. To accept the changes made, press the Enter key. To cancel the changes
made, press the Esc key; to exit from the edit mode, press the Enter key.

16 TOPS Operating Manual

 Editing Stations

Deleting a Station
To delete a Station entirely, including its directional and location information:
1. Select the Station you want to remove from the Data Explorer screen.
2. Click the Delete key on your keyboard.
3. A dialog box appears asking for confirmation that you want to remove the
information. Click the Yes command button to delete the data; click the No
command button to leave the data in the database.

Important If you delete a Station, all of the data associated with it

will be removed.

Editing Station Data

1. Open the Data Explorer - Select Station screen.
2. Select the Station to edit. The row is displayed in blue.
3. Double-click the cell you want to edit. The row is now displayed in yellow
indicating it is in edit mode.
4. Make the necessary changes to the Station.
5. To accept the changes made, press the Enter key.
Or
To cancel the changes made, press the Esc key. To exit from the edit mode,
press the Enter key.

Selecting Multiple Items

To select nonadjacent files an Open dialog box, click the name of one file. Hold
down CTRL and click the name of each additional file.
To select adjacent files in the Open dialog box, click the name of the first file in
the sequence. Hold down SHIFT and click the name of the last file.

Tip If you select a file you don't want, hold down CTRL and click the
file name again.

TOPS Operating Manual 17

Chapter 2 — Managing Stations

CONFIGURING STATION COMMUNICATIONS

This section explains the TOPS side of connecting a field station to the software.

Connecting to a Station
There are three ways to connect to a Station. Before you try any of these methods,
ensure the Connection Properties are entered for the Station.

From the Comms Toolbar

Note Use this method if you want to connect to a station that is not
currently in your database.

1. From the Comms toolbar, select the Type of Protocol from the drop-down list
(Peek ADR, Peek 241, or Peek Idris/ADR 6000).
2. Select the Type of Connection from the drop-down list (local or modem).
3. Click one of the buttons on the toolbar :
Read new files -- Download the new files only.
Read all files -- Download all the files.
Read selected files -- Download specific files only.
ADR Control Panel -- Connect to the ADR Commander. (You must have
the ADR Commander add-in installed and enabled.)

From the Data Explorer -- Station View

This connection method will work only after the communications settings for the
station have already been configured.
1. Select the Station you want to access in the Station View.
2. Right-click the mouse.
3. A popup menu appears. Select one of the following options:
Read new files -- Download the new files only.
Read all files -- Download all the files.
Read selected files -- Download specific files only.
ADR Control Panel -- Connect to the ADR Commander. (You must have
the ADR Commander add-in installed and enabled.)

18 TOPS Operating Manual

 Configuring Station Communications

From the Menus

This connection method will work only after the communications settings for the
station have already been configured.
1. Select the Station you want to access in the Station View.
2. Select Tools from the menu.
3. Select Communications from the drop-down menu.
4. Select one of the following options from the menu:

Read new files -- Download the new files only.

Read all files -- Download all the files.
Read selected files -- Download specific files only.
ADR Control Panel -- Connect to the ADR Commander. (You must have
the ADR Commander add-in installed and enabled.)

Entering Local Connection Properties for a Station

1. Locate the Station you want to add/update the connection information to.
2. Double-click the left mouse button in the Connection column of that Station.
3. Notice the row is now displayed in yellow and a button appears within this field.
Click the button. The Connection Parameters dialog is displayed.
4. In the Connection Type field, select Direct cable from the drop-down list.

Caution If the Peek Idris/ADR 6000 protocol type has been

selected, the Connection Parameters dialog will
change. You must enter your Username and
password to establish a connection.

5. You may edit the Preferred Comm Port by clicking the down arrow in that
field and selecting a different one.
6. You may edit the Preferred Baud Rate by clicking the down arrow in that field
and selecting a different one.
7. If the unit is set to ADR 241, specify the Comm ID number (the default is 1) by
clicking the up/down arrows.
8. If the unit is set to Peek Idris/ADR 6000, specify the Username and
password.
9. Click the OK command button. The information is inserted into the Connection
column for the Station.
10. To exit the edit mode, press the Enter key.

TOPS Operating Manual 19

Chapter 2 — Managing Stations

Entering Modem Connection Properties for a Station

1. Locate the Station you want to add/update the modem information to.
2. Double-click the left mouse button in the Connection column of that Station.
3. Notice the row is now displayed in yellow and a button appears within this field.
Click the button. The Connection Parameters dialog is displayed.
4. In the Connection Type field, select Modem from the drop-down list.
5. Enter the area code and phone number of the modem.
6. Click the OK command button. The information is inserted into the Connection
column for the Station.
7. To exit the edit mode, press the Enter key.

Setting Modem as Default in the Comms Toolbar

1. Select Tools from the menu.
2. Select Communications from the drop-down menu.
3. Select Properties from the menu.
4. Select Manual Options. The Connection Properties dialog box is displayed.
5. Select the modem in the Type of Connection field from the drop-down list.
Notice the window changes so telephone information can be inserted.
6. Select the protocol type from the drop-down list.

Important If the Peek Idris/ADR 6000 protocol type is selected,

select the Protocol Options Tab. You must enter your
Username and password to establish a connection.

7. The system will automatically insert the type of modem installed on your
computer. However, you may change this information if you have more than
one modem.
8. Enter the telephone number of the modem in the appropriate fields.
9. Click the OK command button.

Setting Local as Default in the Comms Toolbar

Follow these procedures to set the default Connection Properties on the Comms
toolbar:
1. Select Tools from the menu.
2. Select Communications from the drop-down menu.

20 TOPS Operating Manual

 Configuring Station Communications

3. Select Properties from the menu.

4. Select Manual Options. The Connection Properties dialog box is displayed.
5. Select Local in the Type of Connection field from the drop-down list.
6. Select the protocol type from the drop-down list.

Important If the Peek Idris/ADR 6000 protocol type is selected, select

the Protocol Options Tab. You must enter your Username
and password to establish a connection.

7. The system will automatically insert the rest of the information for you, but you
may edit it, if necessary. You may change the Port by clicking the down arrow
next to that field and selecting it from the drop-down list.
8. You may change the Baud Rate by clicking the down arrow next to that field
and selecting it from the drop-down list.
9. If you want the system to scan both ports on your computer, check both boxes
in the Ports to Scan list.
10. You may check the speeds you want the system to scan by checking the box
next to it in the Speeds to Scan list.
11. Click the OK command button.

Adding Modem Dial-out Location

1. Open the Data Explorer - Select Station screen.
2. Select Tools from the menu.
3. Select Communications from the drop-down menu.
4. Select Properties from the menu.
5. Select Manual Options. The Connection Properties dialog box is displayed.
6. Ensure modem is selected in the Type of Connection field from the drop-down
list.
7. Click the Set Location command button. The Dialing Properties dialog box is
displayed.
8. Highlight the term "New Location" in the field labeled I am dialing from. Type
the name of the location you want to add.
9. Select the country/region of this location from the drop-down list.

TOPS Operating Manual 21

Chapter 2 — Managing Stations

10. Enter the area code for this location.

Option: You may enter Rules for this Area Code by clicking the Area Code
Rules command button.

a.) The Area Code Rules dialog is displayed. You may check the box to
indicate the system should always dial the area code entered when calling
within the area code.
b.) You may enter a list of prefixes that 1 must be dialed for from within the area
code. Click the New command button, enter the prefix number, click the
OK command button. Repeat this process for each prefix.
c.) You may enter a list of prefixes that 1 should not be dialed when calling
other area codes. Click the New command button, enter the prefix number,
click the OK command button. Repeat this process for each prefix.
11. Click the OK command button.
12. If a number must be dialed to access an outside line or if a number must be
dialed to make a long distance call, enter the numbers in the appropriate fields
displayed.
13. If Call Waiting is an option on the telephone, you may disable it by checking
the "To disable call waiting" box. Then select the number to be dialed from
the drop-down list.
14. You may select Tone dial or Pulse dial for the modem.
15. You may enter information about your long distance calling card, select the
Long Distance Provider from the drop-down list. You may click the Calling
Card command button to enter detail information about your calling card.

Tip At the bottom of this dialog, the "Number to be dialed" has

changed during this process. At this point, this number should
reflect telephone number as it should be dialed. If this is not
correct, make the necessary changes within this window.

16. Click the OK command button.

17. To add additional dial-out locations, repeat the steps above.
18. Click the OK command button on the Connection Properties dialog.

Changing Modem Dial-out Information

1. Open the Data Explorer - Select Station screen.
2. Select Tools from the menu.
3. Select Communications from the drop-down menu.
4. Select Properties from the menu.

22 TOPS Operating Manual

 Configuring Station Communications

5. Select Manual Options. The Connection Properties dialog box is displayed.

6. Ensure modem is selected in the Type of Connection field from the drop-down
list.
7. Click the Set Location command button. The Dialing Properties dialog box is
displayed.
8. Select the location of where you are dialing from/that you want to change
update from the drop-down list.
9. Update the displayed information, as necessary.
10. Click the OK command button.

Adding Calling Card Information

1. Open the Data Explorer - Select Station screen.
2. Select Tools from the menu.
3. Select Communications from the drop-down menu.
4. Select Properties from the menu.
5. Select Manual Options. The Connection Properties dialog box is displayed.
6. Ensure modem is selected in the Type of Connection field from the drop-down
list.
7. Click the Set Location command button. The Dialing Properties dialog box is
displayed.
8. Select the location of where you are dialing from in the drop-down list.
9. Ensure the box is checked labeled "For long distance calls, use this calling
card".
10. Select the Long Distance Provider from the drop-down list.
11. Click the Calling Card command button. The Calling Card dialog box is
displayed.
12. Select the name of the company who provided your calling card. If the
Company name is not displayed, Click the New command button, type in the
name, and click the OK command button.
13. Enter your Personal Identification Number (PIN) for this calling card.
14. Enter the access telephone number to use the calling card for long distance.
If you selected an existing Company name from the drop-down list, this
information may already be inserted.
15. Enter the access number to use the calling card for International calls. If you
selected an existing Company name from the drop-down list, this information
may already be inserted.

TOPS Operating Manual 23

Chapter 2 — Managing Stations

16. Click the Long Distance Calls command button. The Calling Card Sequence
dialog box is displayed.
17. Select the steps that have to be taken for the calling card to function. Default
information has been inserted to assist you with this process. You may enter
up to six steps.
18. Click the OK command button.
19. Click the International Calls command button. The Calling Card Sequence
dialog box is displayed.
20. Select the steps that have to be taken for the calling card to function. Default
information has been inserted to assist you with this process. You may enter
up to six steps.
21. Click the OK command button.
22. Click the OK command button on the Calling Card window.
23. Click the OK command button on the Dialing Properties window.
24. Click the OK command button on the Connection Properties window.

24 TOPS Operating Manual

 Configuring Station Communications

Difficulty Configuring a Field Modem

All of the other topics in this help file that discuss modem configuration concern the
setup of a modem attached to the TOPS computer. They are not talking about how to
configure a modem on the ADR end of the connection, also known as a "field
modem". To fill this gap, this topic has been added to provide hints for setting up an
ADR field modem.

Note This topic does not concern setting up a modem attached to

an ADR-6000. For help with that particular issue, contact
Quixote Traffic customer support. They can be reached at
(800) 245-7660 or [email protected]

If you need to configure a modem on an ADR, follow these guidelines:

The modem should be configured to use the same baud rate as the ADR. (It
should NOT follow the baud rate of the line. Unlike PCs, which can usually
automatically adjust to shifts in the baud rate on the fly, the ADR hardware does
not have that capability. The baud rate coming into the port must remain fixed.)
The modem should be configured to Auto-answer incoming calls.
The modem should have "Echo" turned OFF.
The modem should not require DTR to be asserted before an incoming call is
answered.
The modem should be configured to use result messages, not result codes.
These settings must be stored in non-volatile memory in the modem. This ensures
that communication can be recovered successfully in the case of a power interruption.

TOPS Operating Manual 25

Chapter 2 — Managing Stations

Additional Help
Typically, such a setup of a modem is done using an 'initialization string' that can be
sent to the modem. However, there is no modem initialization string that works
consistently for all available modems and the ADR. To help configure a field modem,
there is a modem configuration utility available on the TOPS installation CD.
1. To use this modem configuration tool, connect the modem you'd like to use
with the ADR to a PC's serial port.
2. To open the utility, insert the TOPS installation CD into the PC and go to the
CD menu. Choose Other Software and then Modem Tool.
3. In the utility, set the modem file (containing the configuration details for your
particular modem), the baud rate and the communication port as appropriate.
Click the Reset modem button.
4. The configuration stored in the modem file will be sent to the modem and
stored. A message will tell you if the modem configuration is not successful.
If you still cannot connect to the ADR through this configured modem, contact Quixote
customer support using the information listed above.

26 TOPS Operating Manual

 Modifying Station View

MODIFYING STATION VIEW

Grid Properties
The Grid Properties command button permits you to select which data columns are
displayed on the Data Explorer screen.

Hiding Columns
1. On the Data Explorer screen, click the Grid Properties command button. The
Grid Properties dialog box is displayed.
2. The list of existing visible columns are displayed in the box on the right. Select
the column name you want to hide.
3. Click the button with the arrow pointing to the left to move the column name
into the list box on the left labeled Hidden Columns.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each column you do not want displayed.
5. Click the OK command button.

Viewing Columns
1. Click the Grid Properties command button on the Data Explorer screen. The
Grid Properties dialog box is displayed.
2. The list on the left shows all of the available columns that are not visible.
Select the column name you want to display.
3. Click the button with the arrow pointing to the right to move the column name
into the list box on the left labeled Hidden Columns.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each column you want displayed.

Note You may move all the column names from the Hidden Column list
box at one time by clicking the command button with double right
arrows.

5. Click the OK command button.

Adjusting Column Size

1. With the mouse, place the arrow on the line between the column heading.
2. When the arrow changes into a symbol with arrows pointing to each side,
press and hold the left mouse button.
3. Move the mouse/line to the left or right to adjust the size of the column.
4. Repeat the steps above for each column, as necessary.

TOPS Operating Manual 27

Chapter 2 — Managing Stations

Changing the Order of Columns

1. With the mouse, place the arrow on the column heading you want to move.
2. Press and hold the left mouse button, drag the column header to the desired
position.
3. Release the mouse button.
4. Repeat the steps above for each column, as necessary.

28 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using Station Filters

USING STATION FILTERS

A large database can make it difficult to find a particular Station or Study because of
the sheer number of rows presented in the Station and Study Views. Applying one or
more filters can significantly reduce the number of visible records.
In the Station View, there are two command buttons on the bottom of the window.
The Station Filters command button will allow you to limit the number of rows or
Stations displayed. The Grid Properties command button will allow you to limit the
number of columns displayed.
In the Study View, filter the visible Studies (or rows) by type of data by clicking the
Study Filters command button.
Show New Data Only check box: Display Stations or Studies that have not
been reported and exported by checking this box. If you are in the Station
View, only those Stations that have one or more Studies that have not been
reported and exported are displayed. If you are in the Study View, only those
Studies that have not been reported and exported are displayed.
Show Session Data Only check box: Display data that has been imported into
the database during the current work session.

What is a Station Filter?

The Station Filter is a powerful tool for Users to easily list a limited number of Stations
in the Data Explorer list box. A User may display Stations that include specific text in
any of the columns or only those that contain data with a specified type of data. The
Station Filter User is creating a query to minimize the data displayed.

Filtering Stations by Text

To apply one or more text filters:
1. Open the Data Explorer - Select Station screen.
2. Click the Station Filters command button. The Station Filters dialog box
appears.
3. Check the box labeled Enable in the Filter by Text section of the dialog box.
The filter fields are now enabled.
4. In the Field column, click the down arrow and select the field you would like
to apply a filter to from the drop-down list box. This list contains the names of
all the columns in the grid box.
5. In the Filter Type column, select the type of operation for the filter. The
following filter types are available:

TOPS Operating Manual 29

Chapter 2 — Managing Stations

Table 5 – Filter types

Filter Type Definition
Equals Display only those stations that match specific text exactly as it is
typed in the Filter Text column.
Contains Display stations that contain certain text in the selected column
Begins With Display stations that start with text in the selected column
Ends With Display stations that finish with text in the selected column
Doesn’t begin with Display stations that do not start with text in the selected column
Doesn’t end with Display stations that do not finish with text in the selected column
Doesn’t contain Display stations that do not contain certain text in the selected
column

6. In the Filter Text column, enter the data you would like to filter.

Caution This field is case sensitive, ensure you capitalize properly.

7. In the Operation section, you must select how the data should be displayed:
Show stations that meet all the above criteria -- Select this button if you
only want to view the stations that meet all of the criteria entered above.
Show stations that meet one of the above criteria -- Select this button if you
want to view stations that meet even one of the criteria entered above.
8. Click the OK command button. Notice the label above the column headers --
the system advises you that the filtering is enabled.
The Data Explorer now displays those Stations that meet the criteria entered into the
filter The more specific the data entered into the filter, the less data will be displayed.
The more vague the data is, the greater the number of Stations will be displayed.

Filtering Stations by Data

1. Open the Data Explorer - Select Station screen.
2. Click the Station Filters command button. The Station Filters dialog box
appears.
3. Check the box labeled Enable in the Filter by Data section of the dialog box.
The Data Filter command button is now enabled.
4. Click the Data Filter command button. The Station Filters dialog box is
displayed.
5. In the Data Type section of this dialog, you may insert a check next to each of
the desired data types.

30 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using Station Filters

6. In the Study Type section, you may insert a check next to either Binned and/or
PVR types of studies.
7. In the Operation section, select whether you would like to see:

Only data with all selected data types -- Studies that must contain all of the
selected data types or
Data with any of the selected data types -- Any one of the selected data
types.
8. Click the OK command button. Only those Studies that match the data
requirements entered above are displayed.

Note The more criteria you select for your filter, the shorter the list of
Studies that will be displayed.

Turning Off the Station Filter

To turn off the Station Filter and display all the available Stations:

Click the Station Filters command button.

Uncheck the Enable check boxes.
Click the OK command button.

Filter Examples
The more criteria you enter into the Station Filter, the less data will be displayed in the
grid box. The following examples are intended to give you a sample of the power of
this filter.

Example A (Simple):
You want to only view Stations whose site ID begin with "1".
1. Click the Station Filters command button.
2. Click the Enable check box in the Text Filters section.
3. In the first column, select Site ID.
4. In the second column, select Begins With.
5. In the third column, type 1.
6. Click the OK command button.

TOPS Operating Manual 31

Chapter 2 — Managing Stations

Example B (Intermediate):
You want to only view Stations whose Station Number ends with "5" and is located in
Sarasota County.
1. Click the Station Filters command button.
2. Click the Enable check box in the Text Filters section.
3. In the first column, select Station Number.
4. In the second column, select Ends With.
5. In the third column, type 5.
6. In the first column of the second row, select County.
7. In the second column of the second row, select Begins With.
8. In the third column of the second row, type Sara.

Important You do not have to type the entire word. The system will
display data that begins with these letters (Sara for
Sarasota). This field is case-sensitive, so you must capitalize
the first letter.

9. Click the OK command button.

32 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using Station Filters

Example C (Difficult):
You want only view Stations that have permanent Station Types, located in Tampa,
and contain Class data.
1. Click the Station Filters command button.
2. Click the Enable check box in the Text Filters section.
3. In the first column, select Station Type.
4. In the second column, select Begins With.
5. In the third column, type Perm.

Caution You do not have to type the entire word. The system will
display data that begins with these letters (Perm for
Permanent). This field is case-sensitive, so you must
capitalize the first letter.

6. In the second row of the first column, select City.

7. In the second row of the second column, select Begins With.
8. In the second row of the third column, type Tampa.
9. Click the Data Filters command button. The Study Filters dialog box is
displayed.
10. Check the box labeled Class. Ensure the rest of the check boxes are not
checked.
11. Click the OK command button. The Study Filters dialog box is closed.
12. Click the OK command button in the Station Filters dialog box.

TOPS Operating Manual 33

Chapter 2 — Managing Stations

34 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 3 — Working with Studies

This section explains how to manage and manipulate ADR studies and data sets within TOPS.
The following topics are discussed in detail in this chapter:

• An introduction to Study View, on page 36.

• Calendar View, on page 36.
• Using study filters, on page 39.
• Downloading and importing data into TOPS, on page 40.

TOPS Operating Manual 35

Chapter 3 — Working with Studies

OVERVIEW
Studies are the way that TOPS and the ADRs manage their data sets. This chapter
discusses how to use the TOPS interface to view and work with studies and the
information they contain.

Data Explorer - Study View

The Data Explorer -- Select Study screen enables you to minimize the contents of the
database displayed. When the Study View Tab is selected, a list of the Studies for
the selected Station(s) are displayed.
You may click the Study Filters command button to only show Studies containing
specific information. The Grid Properties command button will allow you to select
which columns are displayed.
Once a minimum of one day has been selected from the list displayed, the Report
Wizard and Export Wizard buttons are enabled. These features allow you to
generate a report or export.

Data Explorer - Calendar View

The Data Explorer -- Select Study screen enables you to minimize the contents of the
database displayed. When the Calendar View Tab is displayed, you may select data
within a specified time period or specific dates.
You may use the Study Filters command button to only show Studies containing
precise information. The Grid Properties command button will allow you to select
which columns are displayed.
Once a minimum of one day has been selected from the list displayed, the Report
Wizard and Export Wizard buttons are enabled on the toolbar. These features allow
you to generate a report or export.

36 TOPS Operating Manual

 Overview

Study View Columns

In the Data Explorer Study View window, there are numerous columns describing the
downloaded Study. None of the columns may be edited.
Table 6 – Columns in Study View
Column Heading Description
Site ID The Site identification number as recorded in the current
database. You may edit this information typing the updated data.
Station Number The Station Numbers available from the current database. You
may edit this information typing the updated data.
Study Number The number automatically assigned to the Study.
Start Date The start date and time of the Study.
End Date The end date and time of the Study.
Data A brief description of the type of data that was collected for this
Description Study.
Recorder ESN The Electronic Serial Number of the recorder located at the station
when the Study data was collected.

Moving/Changing a Study
You may change the Station reference for one or more Studies. It is possible to
specify the new Site ID and/or Station number.
1. Open the Data Explorer -- Select Station View.
2. Select the Station in the Station grid containing the Studies you want to move.
3. Click the Next command button. The Data Explorer -- Study View tab is
displayed. (If the Calendar View is displayed, click the Study View tab).
4. From the list box, select the study or studies that you want to update.
5. Select Edit from the menu bar or right-click your mouse; a popup menu will
appear.
6. Select Change Study’s Station from the drop-down menu. The Change Station
dialog box is displayed.
7. Select an existing Site ID from the drop-down list, or enter a new site identifier.
This field will contain up to 12 characters.
8. Select an existing Station Number from the drop-down list, or enter in a new
Station number. This field will contain up to 12 characters.
9. Click the OK command button.
10. If you added a new Station, a popup window will appear asking if you want to
add the new Station. Click the OK command button.

TOPS Operating Manual 37

Chapter 3 — Working with Studies

Deleting a Study from a Station

To delete Studies for a Station but retain the Station information:
1. Select the Station from the Data Explorer screen.
2. Click the Next command button.
3. Select the Study View Tab.
4. Select one or more of the Studies displayed.
5. Click the Delete key on your keyboard.
6. A dialog box appears asking for confirmation that you want to remove the
information. Click the Yes command button to delete the data; click the No
command button to leave the data in the database.

Important If you delete Studies from the Study View, the Station data
(including directional information) will be preserved.
However, if you delete a Station, all of the data associated
with it (including directional information) will be deleted.

38 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using Study Filters

USING STUDY FILTERS

What is a Study Filter? The Study Filter is a powerful tool for Users to easily list a
limited number of Studies in the Data Explorer. A User may display Studies that
include specific text in any of the columns or only those that contain data with a
specified type of data. The Study Filter User is creating a query to minimize the data
displayed in the list box.
1. Open the Data Explorer -- Select Station View.
2. Select the Station in the Station grid that you want to work with.
3. Click the Next command button. The Data Explorer -- Study View tab is
displayed. (If the Calendar View is displayed, click the Study View tab).
4. Click the Study Filters command button. The Study Filters dialog box is
displayed. Notice all the fields are disabled.
5. Check the Enable Filtering check box at the bottom of the dialog.
6. In the Data Type section of this dialog, insert a check next to each of the
desired data types.
7. In the Operation section, select whether you would like to see Studies that
must contain all of the selected data types or any one of the selected data
types.
8. Click the OK command button. Notice the label above the column headers --
the system advises you that the filtering is enabled.

Hint The more criteria you select for your filter, the shorter the list of
Studies that will be displayed.

TOPS Operating Manual 39

Chapter 3 — Working with Studies

DOWNLOADING AND IMPORTING DATA

After a Study has been used by an ADR to generate a data set, the data must then be
brought back to TOPS and stored in one of its databases. ‘Downloading’ is the act of
bring the data back from the ADR and storing it on a drive or network location that is
visible to the TOPS installation. ‘Importation’ is the act of bringing the data (or in the
case of PVR files, a reference to the data source file) into the TOPS database of
choice.
There are several paths which can be used to bring data back from an ADR and into
TOPS. These include the Data Transfer module of TOPS ADR Commander, the
Auto-Import Add-in, or the Autopolling function of TOPS. The choice between these
methods depends on how the data files will be transferred to the TOPS computer,
and whether the download and import is an automatic or manual process. The
manual method uses the Data Transfer module, which can be used to retrieve the
data across a modem connection, a direct serial connection, or using files stored on
the local TOPS machine after being transported on data cards. The primary purpose
of Data Transfer is to copy the files from the ADR onto the TOPS computer, but it can
also be used to trigger an ‘automatic’ import of the data into TOPS. The way that Data
Transfer functions is described in the remainder of this chapter.
This automatic importation performed by the Data Transfer module is not the same
thing as the Auto-Import Add-In. Auto-Import functions as a folder watcher. Any time
data files are placed into a directory that TOPS has access to, and which Auto-Import
has been configured to watch, the data will be imported into TOPS automatically.
Auto-Import is described in “Chapter 16 - TOPS Add-In: Auto-Import Module”,
beginning on page 225.
Autopolling, the third option mentioned for transferring data and importing it into
TOPS is actually just a method to schedule Data Transfer and its associated
automatic import activities as future events. These download and import events can
be scheduled as one-time activities or routine activities occuring at regular intervals.
Autopolling is desribed in “Chapter 14-TOPS Add-In: Autopolling”, beginning on page
207.

Activating the Data Transfer Module

1. Select Add-Ins from the menu bar.
2. Select Add-In Manager. The Add-In Manager window is displayed.
3. Check both the boxes next to the module labeled Data Transfer.
Load on Startup -- If checked, the Data Transfer module will load each time
you open TOPS.
Loaded -- If checked, the Data Transfer module will load immediately after
you click the OK command button.
4. Click the OK command button.

40 TOPS Operating Manual

 Downloading and Importing Data

Downloading Data Using a Modem

Caution The Data Transfer module must be enabled to download

data.

If the Auto Import option is enabled, all files you download will automatically be
imported into the database and you won’t be required to import them manually.
1. From the Comms toolbar, select the Type of Protocol from the drop-down list
(Peek ADR, Peek 241, or Peek Idris/ADR 6000).
2. Select modem from the Type of Connection drop-down list,
3. Click one of the buttons on the toolbar :
Read new files -- Download only those files that have not previously been
collected.
Read all files -- Download all the files from the selected Protocol.
Read selected files -- Download specific files you select from a dialog box.
4. If your connection properties have not already been entered, a dialog box
appears. Enter the modem telephone number you want to connect to.
5. Click the OK command button.
6. The system will automatically dial in and download the data into your system.
The files are now displayed in the Data Explorer window.

Importing Data
There are several processes available that can be used to import data files into
TOPS. It is not necessary to select the kind of files you are importing. The file type will
be detected automatically and, if it is supported by TOPS, will be imported.

Verification of the Data to be Imported

TOPS uses two tiers of validation whenever data is imported into the database(s).
The first is a part of the core TOPS data handling system. This check is done before
the information is actually stored in the TOPS database. If an invalid file is selected,
TOPS will detect this and will not import it.

Note One of the tests performed on data is that each record has a valid date.
However, if PVR records are recorded, it is possible for a vehicle to start
crossing a sensor array just before midnight, and with vehicle timeouts, end on
the following day. This has tripped up the simple data checks on the file in the
past, since the data file would be marked with a date and time that was later
than the first record’s start time. Because of this, vehicles with start times of up
to 15 seconds before the file start time are now accepted by TOPS validation.

TOPS Operating Manual 41

Chapter 3 — Working with Studies

The program also uses the DataCheck Add-in module to verify the validity of the data
after it is imported. If DataCheck is installed and configured for operation, TOPS uses
it immediately after data is imported, to flag data records that may be invalid or
questionable. DataCheck is configured using the Options button in the Add-In
Manager, which is available under the Add-Ins menu.

Importing Data Manually

Before TOPS can be used to process any data, the data has to be imported into the
database.
1. Select File from the menu bar.
2. Select Import from the drop-down combo box.
3. Select one of the following options from the menu:
a.) Selected files -- [To download specific files only.] A dialog box appears that
allows you to select the ADR binned files to import. You may select multiple
files. Click the Open command button and the importing will begin.
b.) Directory Contents -- [To download all the files within one directory.]
Select the name of the directory you want to import. Click the OK
command button and the importing will begin.

Importing Data Automatically Using Data Transfer

You may elect to have TOPS import data automatically when the system uses Data
Transfer to download files. You must follow these procedures to configure the
operation of Data Transfer prior to downloading the data in order for the system to
import it at the same time.
1. Select View from the menu.
2. Select Options from the drop-down menu. The Options dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select the General Tab, if it is not displayed.
4. Check the box labeled "Import Files after download".
5. Click the OK command button.

AutoPolling to Import Data

In general, Autopolling is simply a method to schedule Data Transfer, Event log
retrieval, and status request events for one or more ADR units at some point in the
future, or at regular intervals. If Data Transfer is configured to automatically import the
data after the retrieving it from the ADR, an Autopolling event to retrieve the data file
will also cause it to be imported automatically into TOPS. For more information about
Autopolling, refer to page 207.

42 TOPS Operating Manual

 Downloading and Importing Data

Importing Data Using Auto-Import

The Auto-Import Add-In is available in TOPS v3.7 and higher. This component will
automatically import data files into TOPS if they are placed within its Watch Directory,
(or in any directory beneath the Watch directory.) The operation of this Add-In is
described beginning on page 225.

TOPS Operating Manual 43

Chapter 3 — Working with Studies

44 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 4 — Managing TOPS Databases

This section explains how to open, close, and work with TOPS databases. The following topics
are discussed in detail in this chapter:

• An introduction to how TOPS databases are used, on page 46.

• Working with databases in TOPS, on page 47.
• Managing data sets, on page 48.
• Database maintenance activities, on page 50.

TOPS Operating Manual 45

Chapter 4 — Managing TOPS Databases

INTRODUCTION
From within TOPS you can connect to different databases, save a copy and create new
databases easily from the menu. Below is a list of operations and how to complete them:

Open a database: Select File from the menu bar, select Open from the drop-
down menu. A dialog box is displayed and prompts you to locate the database
you want to open.
Close current database: Select File from the menu bar, select Close from
the drop-down menu. The active database is closed.
Save current database with a new name: Select File from the menu bar,
select Save As from the drop-down menu. A dialog box is displayed and
prompts you for a name and directory to save the current database. You are
then connected to the new version of the database.
Create a new database: Select File from the menu bar, select New from the
drop-down menu. A dialog box is displayed and prompts you for a name and
directory to store the new database. You are then connected to the new version
of the database. The new database will contain no Station or Study data. If the
system is currently connected to a database, that connection will automatically
be terminated.
Compact and repair the database: Select Tools from the menu bar, select
Database from the drop-down menu, select Compact and Repair. The
Compact and Repair feature will run on the current database.

46 TOPS Operating Manual

 Working With TOPS Databases

WORKING WITH TOPS DATABASES

Opening a Database
Select File from the menu bar, select Open from the drop-down menu. A dialog box
is displayed and prompts you to locate the database you want to open.

Closing a Database
Select File from the menu bar, select Close from the drop-down menu. The active
database is closed.

Creating a New Database

Select File from the menu bar, select New from the drop-down menu. A dialog box
is displayed and prompts you for a name and directory to store the new database.
You are then connected to the new version of the database. The new database will
contain no Station or Study data. If the system is currently connected to a database,
that connection will automatically be terminated. How to import data manually
Before TOPS can be used to process any data, the data has to be imported into the
database.
1. Select File from the menu bar.
2. Select Import from the drop-down combo box.
3. Select one of the following options from the menu:

a.) Selected files -- [To download specific files only.] A dialog box appears that
allows you to select the ADR binned files to import. You may select multiple
files. Click the Open command button and the importing will begin.
b.) Directory Contents -- [To download all the files within one directory.]
Select the name of the directory you want to import. Click the OK
command button and the importing will begin.

Caution If an invalid file is selected, TOPS will detect this and

will not import it. It is not necessary to select the kind of
files you are importing. The file type will be detected
automatically and, if it is supported by TOPS, will be
imported.

TOPS Operating Manual 47

Chapter 4 — Managing TOPS Databases

MANAGING DATA

Importing Data Manually

Before TOPS can be used to process any data, the data has to be imported into the
database.
1. Select File from the menu bar.
2. Select Import from the drop-down combo box.
3. Select one of the following options from the menu:

a.) Selected files -- [To download specific files only.] A dialog box appears that
allows you to select the ADR binned files to import. You may select multiple
files. Click the Open command button and the importing will begin.
b.) Directory Contents -- [To download all the files within one directory.]
Select the name of the directory you want to import. Click the OK
command button and the importing will begin.

Caution If an invalid file is selected, TOPS will detect this and will
not import it. It is not necessary to select the kind of files
you are importing. The file type will be detected
automatically and, if it is supported by TOPS, will be
imported.

Importing Data Automatically

You may elect to have TOPS import data automatically when the system downloads.
You must follow these procedures prior to downloading the data in order for the
system to import it at the same time.
1. Select View from the menu.
2. Select Options from the drop-down menu. The Options dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select the General Tab, if it is not displayed.
4. Check the box labeled "Import Files after download".
5. Click the OK command button.

48 TOPS Operating Manual

 Managing Data

Reducing the Amount of Visible Data

A large database can make it difficult to find a particular Station or Study because of
the sheer number of rows presented in the Station and Study Views. Applying one or
more filters can significantly reduce the number of visible records.
In the Station View, there are two command buttons on the bottom of the window.
The Station Filters command button will allow you to limit the number of rows or
Stations displayed. The Grid Properties command button will allow you to limit the
number of columns displayed.
In the Study View, filter the visible Studies (or rows) by type of data by clicking the
Study Filters command button.
Show New Data Only check box: Data imported into TOPS is immediately
marked as ‘New’. The New marker is only removed when data is included in a
report or export file. When in the Station View, this control causes only those
Stations that include Study data that has not yet been included in a report or an
export file to be displayed. In Study View, only those Studies that include data
that has not yet been included in a report or an export file are displayed. The
New marker on study data is maintained across sessions.
Show Session Data Only check box: Display only data (in the form of Stations
and Studies) that has been imported into the database during the current TOPS
session.

TOPS Operating Manual 49

Chapter 4 — Managing TOPS Databases

DATABASE MAINTENANCE

Backup a Database
1. Select File from the menu bar.
2. Select Save As from the drop-down menu. The Save As dialog box is
displayed.
3. Enter the name of the backup copy.
4. You may change the location of where this information will be stored by
selecting it from the drop-down list of file names in the "Save in" field.
5. Click the Save command button.

Compacting and Repairing Databases

As data is imported into and deleted from the database, it will increase in size. To
ensure the database remains manageable and runs efficiently, there is a utility within
TOPS to compact and repair the database. This will remove wasted space within the
database and fix any problems between related data.

You may click the Compact and Repair button on the database toolbar.
Or
1. Select Tools from the menu bar.
2. Select Database from the drop-down menu.
3. Select Compact and Repair. The feature will run on the current database.

Caution If a database has not been compacted within 30 days,

TOPS will prompt you to do so.

50 TOPS Operating Manual

 Database Maintenance

Updating the database version

If you connect to a TOPS database that was created by the previous version of
TOPS, a popup message will appear advising you to convert the selected database.
You must perform this conversion in order to proceed with the update.
1. Select one of the two options:

a.) Copy all Stations: This will maintain all of the Stations in the current
database regardless of whether they have data associated with them.
b.) Copy only Stations with data: This will only maintain the Stations in the
Station list for which there currently is data loaded into the database.
2. Click the OK command button.

Caution If you choose not to perform the conversion and click the
Cancel command button, you will be unable to connect to
the database.

Once the conversion is complete, you will be connected to the converted database.
The database name will remain the same. The original database will be stored in the
old format and renamed "Vn B a c k up o f D A T A B A S E .md b " where n stands for
the internal database version number. If you are updating from a version of TOPS
that is more than one update behind, multiple backup database files will be created;
one for each of the intervening database versions.

TOPS Operating Manual 51

Chapter 4 — Managing TOPS Databases

52 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 5 —Site Configuration

This chapter explains how to configure site geometry information into TOPS. The following
topics are discussed in detail in this chapter:

• Managing site layout information, on page 54.

• Setting up and using channel maps, on page 57.
• Setting up and using array maps, on page 60.
• Using lane assignments, on page 64.

TOPS Operating Manual 53

Chapter 5 —Site Configuration

MANAGING SITE LAYOUT

Editing Site Layout Data

1. Open the Data Explorer -- Select Station View.
2. Select the Site ID from the list displayed that you want to update.
3. Right-click your mouse, a pop-up menu appears.
4. Select Directions / Lanes. The Site Editor dialog box is displayed.
5. Make the necessary changes to the data displayed:
Number of Lanes — This field defines the number of lanes being monitored
at the specified location. To update this number, click the up and down arrows
next to this field.
Lane number — This field is automatically populated by the Number of Lanes
selected. It cannot be edited by the User.
TMG Lane ID — The Traffic Monitoring Guide (TMG) Lane identification field
is automatically populated when the Number of Lanes changes. This
information may be edited; up to six characters may be inserted. This
identifier is utilized by the TOPS reports.
Direction — The forward compass direction of traffic flow for the lane. In the
case of a two-directional lane (i.e.: a center lane for all left turns), select one
direction. When editing directions for the Studies, specify both directions.
Comment — Any alpha/numeric data may be inserted into this field. It may
contain up to 256 characters. Note The text is utilized in reports to build the
channel heading if "use lane comments" is selected for the report channel
headings.
6. Indicate how to apply the physical layout. There are two options:

Apply to all data — Select this option to indicate this is the one layout for this
site. This option is the most commonly used.
Apply to all data in a Range — Select this option if this layout is only valid for
the site within specified dates.
7. To accept the changes made, click the OK command button. To cancel the
changes made, click the Cancel command button.

Recording Dates of Site Layout Changes

If an existing site changes in the number of lanes of traffic, or the direction of the
traffic flow where you have been recording data, it is necessary to adjust the site
layout information. After doing so in the Site Editor dialog box, be sure to indicate
when the site changed, so that accurate study data will be recorded and to properly
track the historical information of the site.

54 TOPS Operating Manual

 Managing Site Layout

Updating Site Information in a Time/Date Range

1. Open the Data Explorer -- Select Station View.
2. Select the Site ID from the list displayed that you want to update.
3. Right-click your mouse, a pop-up menu appears.
4. Select Directions / Lanes. The Site Editor dialog box is displayed.
5. You may change the number of lanes at the site by clicking the up/down arrow.
Notice as you change the number, the grid box changes to reflect this number.
6. Place your cursor in the Direction column in the row you want to update.
Notice a down arrow appears once you click the mouse key.
7. Click the down arrow and select the Direction of the flow of traffic from the
drop-down list.
8. Select the Apply this site layout to data in the Range button.
9. The date fields are now enabled. You may enter the "From" date in one of two
ways:
Type the dates using the appropriate format for your computer (mm/dd/yy or
dd/mm/yy).
Or
Click the down arrow next to the field to display a calendar. Select the date on
the calendar that the site layout changed. The system will automatically insert
the selected date into the "From" field.
10. Repeat Step 2 to insert the "To" date of the site layout change.

Important If the site has not changed, leave the "To" field blank. The
lack of information implies the site change is through the
present date.

11. Click the OK command button.

If you reopen the Site Editor, you will notice a field above the grid box labeled "Site
History". This list contains the history of how the site has changed since data has
been recorded at this location.

TOPS Operating Manual 55

Chapter 5 —Site Configuration

Deleting a Site Layout

Follow these steps to delete the site layout information.
1. Open the Data Explorer -- Select Station View.
2. Select the Site ID from the list displayed that you want to update.
3. Right-click your mouse, a pop-up menu appears.
4. Select Directions / Lanes. The Site Editor dialog box is displayed.
5. In the field above the grid box labeled "Site History" the list contains the history
of how the site has changed since data has been recorded at this location.
Click the down arrow and select the Layout from the drop-down list you want to
remove.
6. Click the Delete This Layout command button.
7. A popup window appears asking for confirmation that you want to remove this
layout. Click the OK command button.
8. Click the OK command button on the Site Editor box.

56 TOPS Operating Manual

 Working With Channel Maps

WORKING WITH CHANNEL MAPS

TOPS allows lanes of data to be assigned to channels in a binned data study. The
next sections describe how to work with channel assignments in the application.

Using the Channel Map Editor

The Channel Map Editor allows you to tell TOPS which lane(s) is in each channel of a
binned data Study. To view this information:
1. Open the Data Explorer -- Select Station View.
2. Click the Next command button. The Data Explorer - Study View tab is
displayed. If this tab is not displayed, click the Tab.
3. Select the Binned Study from the list in the grid box.
4. Right-click the mouse. A popup menu appears.
5. Select Channel / Lane Map from the menu. This Select Lane dialog box
contains a grid where each row represents one channel. The columns indicate
the following:

Column 1: The channel number for the Study.

Column 2: The lane(s) for which this channel records data.
6. When you have finished reviewing the data, click the Cancel command button.

Change the Lane of a Channel

1. Open the Data Explorer -- Select Station View.
2. Click the Next command button. The Data Explorer - Study View tab is
displayed. If this tab is not displayed, click the Tab.
3. Select the Binned Study from the list in the grid box.
4. Right-click the mouse. A popup menu appears.
5. Select Channel / Lane Map from the menu. This Select Lane dialog box
contains a grid where each row represents one channel. The columns indicate
the following:

Column 1: The channel number for the Study.

Column 2: The lane(s) for which this flow records data.
6. Place your cursor in the Lane column in the row containing the appropriate
channel.

Caution You must select the row in the Lane column in order to proceed.

TOPS Operating Manual 57

Chapter 5 —Site Configuration

7. Click the Build button that appears on the right side of this row. The Lane
Selection dialog box is displayed.
8. The information in the Lane Selection dialog box applies to the selected
channel only; the channel number is displayed in the text above the list.
Check the boxes to update the direction of the lane(s) indicating whether it
flows forward or in reverse, as necessary.
9. Click the OK command button.
10. Repeat the steps above to update each channel.
11. Select the Studies you would like to apply these settings to. There are three
options:

a.) This Study only -- will apply the settings to the selected Study only.
b.) All Compatible Studies -- will apply the settings to all Studies for this
Station that have the same array configuration. This is the most commonly
selected option.
c.) All Compatible Studies in Range -- will apply the settings as in Option B
but only to Studies in the date range specified.
12. Click the OK command button.

Editing Channels Within a Date Range

The Channel Map Editor allows you to tell TOPS which lane(s) is in each channel of a
binned data Study. To update this information for a specific date range:
1. Open the Data Explorer -- Select Station View.
2. Click the Next command button. The Data Explorer - Study View tab is
displayed. If this tab is not displayed, click the Tab.
3. Select the range of binned studies from the list in the grid box: click the first
binned study on the start date, hold the SHFT key down and select the last
binned study on the end date. Notice by holding down the SHFT key, all the
binned studies in the grid between the two dates are highlighted.
4. Select Edit from the menu.
5. Select Channel / Lane Mapping from the drop-down menu. This Select Lane
dialog box contains a grid where each row represents one channel. The
columns indicate the following:

Column 1: The channel number for the Study. This field cannot be modified.
Column 2: The lane(s) for which this channel records data.
6. Place your cursor in the Lane column in the row containing the appropriate
channel.

58 TOPS Operating Manual

 Working With Channel Maps

Important You must select the row in the Lane column in order to
proceed.

7. Click the Build button that appears on the right side of this row. The Lane
Selection dialog box is displayed.
8. The information in the Lane Selection dialog box applies to the selected
channel only; the channel number is displayed in the text above the list.
Check the boxes to update the direction of the lane(s) indicating whether it
flows forward or in reverse, as necessary.
9. Click the OK command button to close the Lane Selection dialog box.
10. Repeat the steps above to update each channel.

Note Since you selected the binned studies from the Study View
within a specific date range, the "All Compatible Studies in
Range" button is selected and the dates are inserted for you.

11. Click the OK command button.

TOPS Operating Manual 59

Chapter 5 —Site Configuration

WORKING WITH ARRAY MAPS

This portion of TOPS directionality allows the operator to configure station and study
data to particular sensing arrays. The next four sections discuss how to work with
these array assignments.

Using the Array Map Editor

Figure 2 – Array Map Editor window

Site ID — The current site ID information from the current database. This data is
informational only.
Station Number — The current station number from the current database. This data
is informational only.
Array number — an absolute number for a study
Array description — A description of the type of array. This information is displayed
but disabled, and cannot be edited.
Flow number — The flow number within each array. This information is displayed but
disabled, and cannot be edited.
Flow lanes — The lane location(s) where the currently selected flow records data.
Apply to: This Study Only — Select this option to apply the changes only to the
currently selected Study.
Apply to: All Compatible Studies — Select this option to apply the changes to all
studies that are compatible with this hardware.
Apply to: All Compatible Studies in Range — Select this option to apply the
changes to all studies that are compatible with the stations, and that fall within the
date range listed at the bottom of the window.

60 TOPS Operating Manual

 Working With Array Maps

Updating Array Flow Data

With PVR data, each vehicle record has a sensor array number and flow
automatically input in their respective fields. You must tell TOPS which array is
mapped to which lane. The Array Map Editor gives you the ability to input which
lane(s) are being monitored by which array flows for a PVR Data Study.
1. Open the Data Explorer -- Select Station View. Select the Station(s) you want
to work with.
2. Click the Next command button. The Data Explorer - Study View tab is
displayed. If this tab is not displayed, click the Tab.
3. Select the PVR Study from the list in the grid box that you want to update.
4. Right-click the mouse. A popup menu appears.
5. Select Flow / Lane Map from the menu. The Array Map Editor dialog box is
displayed.
6. Select the row containing the flow you want to update.

Caution You must select the row in the Lane column in order to
proceed.

7. Click the Build button that appears on the right side of this row. The Lane
Selection dialog box is displayed.
8. Insert a check in the appropriate checkbox(es) indicating which direction each
Lane flows.
9. Click the OK command button.
10. Repeat the steps above to update each array in the list box.
11. Select the Studies you would like to apply these settings to. There are three
options:

a.) This Study only -- will apply the settings to the selected Study only.
b.) All Compatible Studies -- will apply the settings to all Studies for this
Station that have the same array configuration. This is the most commonly
selected option and is selected by default.
c.) All Compatible Studies in Range -- will apply the settings only to Studies in
the date range specified.
12. Click the OK command button.

TOPS Operating Manual 61

Chapter 5 —Site Configuration

Changing the Lane Assigned to a Flow

1. Open the Data Explorer -- Select Station View.
2. Click the Next command button. The Data Explorer - Study View tab is
displayed. If this tab is not displayed, click the Tab.
3. Select the row containing the flow you want to update.

Important You must select the row in the Lane column in order to
proceed.

4. Click the Build button that appears on the right side of this row. The Lane
Selection dialog box is displayed.
5. The information in the Lane Selection dialog box applies to the selected flow
only. Check the boxes to update the direction of the lane(s) indicating whether
it flows forward or in reverse, as necessary.
6. Click the OK command button.
7. Repeat the steps above to update each flow.
8. Select the Studies you would like to apply these settings to. There are three
options:

a.) This Study only -- will apply the settings to the selected Study only.
b.) All Compatible Studies -- will apply the settings to all Studies for this Station
that have the same array configuration. This is the most commonly selected
option.
c.) All Compatible Studies in Range -- will apply the settings only to Studies in
the date range specified.

9. Click the OK command button.

Editing Array Flow Within a Date Range

With PVR data, each vehicle record has a sensor array number and flow
automatically input in their respective fields. You must tell TOPS which array is
mapped to which lane. The Array Map Editor gives you the ability to input which
lane(s) are being monitored by which array flows for a PVR Data Study.
1. Open the Data Explorer -- Select Station View. Select the Station(s) you want
to work with.
2. Click the Next command button. The Data Explorer - Study View tab is
displayed. If this tab is not displayed, click the Tab.

62 TOPS Operating Manual

 Working With Array Maps

3. Select the range of PVR Studies from the list in the grid box: click the first PVR
study on the start date, hold the SHFT key down and select the last PVR study
on the end date. Notice by holding down the SHFT key, all the studies in the
grid between the two dates are highlighted.
4. Select Edit from the menu.
5. Select Channel / Lane Mapping from the drop-down menu. The Array Map
Editor dialog box is displayed.
6. Select the row containing the flow you want to update.

Important You must select the row in the Lane column in order to
proceed.

7. Click the Build button that appears on the right side of this row. The Lane
Selection dialog box is displayed.
8. Insert a check in the appropriate checkbox(es) indicating which direction each
Lane flows.
9. Click the OK command button to close the Lane Selection dialog box.
10. Repeat the steps above to update each array.

Note Since you selected the range of PVR studies from the Study
View within a specific date range, the "All Compatible Studies in
Range" button is selected and the dates are inserted for you.

11. Click the OK command button.

TOPS Operating Manual 63

Chapter 5 —Site Configuration

WORKING WITH LANE SELECTION

In most instances, once the Site Editor is run, TOPS will contain enough information
to produce the correct results regarding directional information in a report or export.
However, there are times the lane direction must be inserted into each channel or
array-flow in the Studies.

Inserting Lane Direction Information

1. Open the Data Explorer -- Select Station View.
2. Select the Site ID from the list displayed that you want to update.
3. Right-click your mouse, a pop-up menu appears.
4. Select Directions / Lanes. The Site Editor dialog box is displayed.
5. Place your cursor in the Direction column in the row you want to update.
Notice a down arrow appears once you click the mouse key.
6. Click the down arrow and select the Direction of the flow of traffic from the
drop-down list.
7. Select one of the following options:
Apply this site layout to all data -- Select this button if you want the changes
made to apply to all the data in the database for this site.
Apply this site layout to data in the range -- In the event this site has recent
changes to the number of lanes or the direction of the traffic flow where you
have been recording data for a period of time, you may input the exact date the
site changed.
8. Click the OK command button.

Changing the Lane Assigned to a Channel

1. Open the Data Explorer -- Select Station View.
2. Click the Next command button. The Data Explorer - Study View tab is
displayed. If this tab is not displayed, click the Tab.
3. Select the Binned Study from the list in the grid box.
4. Right-click the mouse. A popup menu appears.
5. Select Channel / Lane Map from the menu. This Select Lane dialog box
contains a grid where each row represents one channel. The columns indicate
the following:
Column 1: The channel number for the Study.
Column 2: The lane(s) for which this flow records data.

64 TOPS Operating Manual

 Working With Lane Selection

6. Place your cursor in the Lane column in the row containing the appropriate
channel.

Important You must select the row in the Lane column in order to
proceed.

7. Click the Build button that appears on the right side of this row. The Lane
Selection dialog box is displayed.
8. The information in the Lane Selection dialog box applies to the selected
channel only; the channel number is displayed in the text above the list.
Check the boxes to update the direction of the lane(s) indicating whether it
flows forward or in reverse, as necessary.
9. Click the OK command button.
10. Repeat the steps above to update each channel.
11. Select the Studies you would like to apply these settings to. There are three
options:

a.) This Study only -- will apply the settings to the selected Study only.
b.) All Compatible Studies -- will apply the settings to all Studies for this Station
that have the same array configuration. This is the most commonly selected
option.
c.) All Compatible Studies in Range -- will apply the settings as in Option B but
only to Studies in the date range specified.
12. Click the OK command button.

Changing the Lane Assigned to a Flow

1. Open the Data Explorer -- Select Station View.
2. Click the Next command button. The Data Explorer - Study View tab is
displayed. If this tab is not displayed, click the Tab.
3. Select the row containing the flow you want to update.

Important You must select the row in the Lane column in order to
proceed.

4. Click the Build button that appears on the right side of this row. The Lane
Selection dialog box is displayed.
5. The information in the Lane Selection dialog box applies to the selected flow
only. Check the boxes to update the direction of the lane(s) indicating whether
it flows forward or in reverse, as necessary.

TOPS Operating Manual 65

Chapter 5 —Site Configuration

6. Click the OK command button.

7. Repeat the steps above to update each flow.
8. Select the Studies you would like to apply these settings to. There are three
options:

a.) This Study only -- will apply the settings to the selected Study only.
b.) All Compatible Studies -- will apply the settings to all Studies for this Station
that have the same array configuration. This is the most commonly selected
option.
c.) All Compatible Studies in Range -- will apply the settings only to Studies in
the date range specified.

9. Click the OK command button.

66 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and
Exporting Data

This section explains how to distill information out of the TOPS database(s) in the form of
reports and export data files. The following topics are discussed in detail in this chapter:

• Introduction to report creation in TOPS, on page 68.

• The Report Wizard, on page 71.
• Formatting reports, on page 72.
• Creating BIN reports, on page 78.
• Creating Per-vehicle-record (PVR) reports, on page 107.
• Standard configuration screens for PVR reports, on page 118.
• Exporting data to files, on page 123.

TOPS Operating Manual 67

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

INTRODUCTION TO REPORT CREATION IN TOPS

As can be seen on the flow of information through the TOPS modules, a report is one
of the two ultimate outputs of the TOPS system. (The other option is an Export of the
data.) TOPS can be configured to flow automatically from the Select Study screen to
either the Report wizard or the Export wizard. By default, TOPS is configured to open
the Report Wizard.

Figure 3 – TOPS modules - Reports and Exports are in blue

Creating Reports
The basic process of generating a report in TOPS is to select a Station, then one or
more Studies worth of data, and then to use the Report Wizard to create the report.
From there, the report can either be saved, printed or discarded.
The list of reports that appear in the Wizard depend on the type of data that was
chosen. Binned data files only show binned data reports, and PVR files only provide
PVR report options. Only reports for which some data exists in at least one of the
selected studies appear in the Wizard's reports list.

68 TOPS Operating Manual

 Introduction to Report Creation in TOPS

Selecting Data and Generating a Report

Follow these steps to generate a TOPS report:
1. Open the Data Explorer -- Select Station View.
2. Highlight the station or stations whose data you'd like to analyze.
3. Click the Next command button. The Data Explorer -- Study View tab is
displayed.
4. Select the data that you want to use in your report from either the Study View
or Calendar View.
5. Click the Report Wizard button.
Or
Select File from the menu bar, select Report from the drop-down menu.
6. Review the instructions on the Report Wizard window. Click the Next
command button.
7. Select one or more of the listed reports. You'll be presented with either a list of
Bin reports, or PVR reports.

Note To run the report without displaying the rest of the wizard or data,
check the box labeled "Run export in unattended mode". The
default settings are applied and the report is not displayed but sent
directly to the printer.

8. Click the Next command button to edit the options for the selected reports, if
applicable. Click the Finish command button. The report will be generated
and the results displayed.

Deciding How to Output a Report

You have three options (Save, Print, or Close) with the displayed report:
1. You may Save the report by selecting File from the menu bar.

Note You may save the report in the following formats: Excel 5/95,
Excel 97, Tabbed text, Tabbed text (data only), HTML, HTML
(data only), and Formula One. If saved in the HTML format, only
the current worksheet is saved, not the entire report.

2. Select Save As from the drop-down menu.

3. Enter the name of the file in the File Name field.
4. Ensure the correct Save as Type is selected from the drop-down list.

TOPS Operating Manual 69

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

5. Click the Save command button.

Or
1. You may Print the report by clicking the Print command button.
2. When the Print dialog box appears, ensure the Printer information is accurate.
3. Click the OK command button.
Or
1. Click the Close command button to return to the Data Explorer.

70 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using the Report Wizard

USING THE REPORT WIZARD

There are three ways to start the Report Wizard:

Click the Report Wizard icon.

Press the F2 key.
Open the File menu and select the Report command.

Selecting a Default Report Wizard

In the Data Explorer - Study View, it is possible to configure which wizard is enabled
when you click the Next command button.
1. Select View from the menu.
2. Select Options from the drop-down menu. The Options dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select the General Tab, if it is not displayed.
4. Select the wizard you prefer to start when the Next command button is clicked
in the Study View window.
5. Click the OK command button.

TOPS Operating Manual 71

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

FORMATTING REPORTS
The reports that are generated by TOPS are highly configurable. The header, fonts,
labels, column headings and other settings can all be modified.

Modifying the Report Header

A report header is automatically inserted at the top of the first page of all reports.
However, the contents and layout of this header can be modified.
The top window of the Header Editor window shows the current appearance of the
report header. The bottom left pane shows the available fields that can be included in
the header but currently aren't. The bottom right pane shows the fields that are
currently included in the header.
The contents of the header can be controlled by moving fields back and forth between
the bottom two windows. Use the four arrow buttons to do this.

Note The columns in these two bottom windows can be minimized by right-clicking on
the column header. Right-click again to expand a column.

Header Editing Window

Figure 4 – Header Editing Window

72 TOPS Operating Manual

 Formatting Reports

Header Preview
This window shows how the current Chosen Fields will appear in the header of the
printed report. Right and left-aligned fields may appear off to the right and left of the
window when it is first displayed.

Available fields
These are the available pieces of information that may be added to a header. If a field
appears in this list, it means that the information is not currently displayed in the
header. Use the top two arrow keys if you wish to move the field to the Chosen Fields
list.

Header field column headers

Right-click on a column header in this window to minimize the column. Right-click it
again to expand the column.

Chosen fields
These fields will appear in the report header. The order that they appear on the page
is determined by where they appear in this list. Use the bottom two arrow buttons if
you wish to remove one or more of these fields from the header.

Add selected fields to the header

This button adds the fields that are currently highlighted in the Available Fields
window to the bottom of the list in the Chosen Fields window.

Add all fields to the header

This button adds all of the fields that are currently in the Available Fields window to
the bottom of the list in the Chosen Fields window.

Remove selected fields from the header

This button removes the fields that are highlighted in the Chosen Fields window and
they reappear in the Available Fields window.

Remove all fields from the header

This button removes all of the fields from the Chosen Fields window. They reappear
in the Available Fields list.

Header editor help

Opens the Header Editor Window help screen.

Header Editor OK button

Accepts the current header settings, as shown in the Header Preview window.

TOPS Operating Manual 73

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Header Editor cancel button

Closes this window and discards any changes that were made to the report header
since the window was opened.

Modifying Agency Name and Registered User Name

The Agency and Registered User names that appear on reports generated by TOPS
can be changed using the View > Options window, if you select the Reports tab.
Registered User appears in the Options window as “User Name”. Both values are set
‘per user’, so the person that is logged into TOPS can only change his own entries for
these fields. This capability requires that the logged in user have at least the right to
change his or her own password. The default value for these items is the text that
was entered during the installation of TOPS.

Selecting a Default Font for Reports

You may select the default font for your reports.
1. Select View from the menu.
2. Select Options from the drop-down menu. The Options dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select the Report tab.
4. Select the font from the drop-down list.
5. Select the font size from the drop-down list. Notice as you change the font
size and font style, the sample box displays how text will appear.
6. If you want the system to allow you to edit the reports, check the box labeled
Allow Editing.
7. Click the OK command button.

Formatting Report Labels

You may select the format of the Channel labels in a Report.
1. Select View from the menu.
2. Select Options from the drop-down menu. The Options dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select the Labels tab.
4. Select the type of label you prefer.
5. If you would like the direction included in the label, check the box labeled
Include direction. Then select whether you want the full direction description
displayed or the abbreviation.
6. Click the OK command button.

74 TOPS Operating Manual

 Formatting Reports

Figure 5 – Report Labels tab in Options window

Channel labels
There are four options for how channels will be labeled in TOPS:

Lane Comment – This option will use the comments entered into the Site Editor
for the lanes as the heading text for the channels. (Ex.: Enter Exit)
Lane Number – This option will use the lane number from the left column of the
Site Editor to label the channels. (Ex.: Lane 1 Lane 2 Lane 3 Lane 4)
TMG Lane ID – This option will use the number in the TMG Lane ID column of
the Site Editor to label the channels. (Ex.: Lane 1 Lane 2 Lane 2 Lane 1)
Channel Number – This option will use only the channel number as the label
for each channel. (Ex.: Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4)

Include direction
Checking this box makes the channel labels include the direction(s) recorded to that
channel. Below this check box are two options for how the directions will be
displayed.
Full Direction - This option has the direction completely spelled out. [Ex. “Lane
1 (North)”]
Abbreviated Direction - This option has the direction in a shortened format.
[Ex. “Lane 1 (N)”]

TOPS Operating Manual 75

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Modifying Row & Column Headings

1. Once your report is displayed on your screen, double-click the row or column
heading you want to modify. The Edit Heading dialog box is displayed.
2. Enter the desired text for your row or column.
3. Click the OK command button.
4. Once the report is closed, the edited text is lost.

Modifying Channel Headings on a Volume Report

Channel headings may be saved and restored the next time a report is generated.
The headings cannot be saved directly from the edited headings in the report. To
insert custom labels for the channels of your report:
1. Select View from the menu.
2. Select Options from the drop-down menu.
3. Select the Labels tab.
4. Select the Use Lane Comments button.
5. Click the OK command button.
6. Right-click on the desired Station. The Station View popup menu appears.
7. Select Directions / Lanes. The Site Editor dialog box is displayed.
8. Type the channel headings for each lane in the Comments column.
9. Click the OK command button.
10. Open the Data Explorer - Study View or Calendar View and select the data for
your report.
11. Generate a daily volume report using the Report Wizard. Notice the channels
are displayed with the labels you specified in the site editor.

Modifying Column Headings for a Class Report

In the daily and monthly class reports, changes made to the class column headings
may be saved and restored the next time a report is generated. These labels are
stored globally and will be used on all reports for all Stations in the database.
1. Generate a daily or monthly class report using the Report Wizard.

Important Only the column headings can be updated and saved,

labels in rows cannot be modified and saved.

2. Double-click the first class heading ("Class 1"). The Edit Heading dialog box is
displayed.

76 TOPS Operating Manual

 Formatting Reports

3. Enter the new column heading name.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each column heading you want to modify.
5. Click the Close command button.
6. A popup window appears asking for confirmation that you want to save the
updated labels. Click the Yes command button.
Any class report (including the weekly) will be displayed with this column heading.
To return the column headings to their original labels (Class 1, etc.), complete the
steps above.

Updating the Printing Options of a Report

Once you have generated a report in TOPS, the report is displayed on your screen.
You may update the previously selected printing options.
1. Click the Options command button at the bottom of the window. A dialog box
appears that resembles the Options Tab in the wizard, depending on the type
of report you are printing.
2. You may update the print settings in this window.
3. To modify the Header of the Report, click the Header command button. The
Header Editor dialog box is displayed.
4. At the top of the dialog is a window with the header as it will appear on the
report. The bottom of the dialog shows two lists: The one on the left
represents the Available Fields that are not included in the existing header; the
list on the right shows the Fields included in the Report header. You may
add/remove the data displayed and/or change the layout of the header.
5. To adjust the location of information displayed in the header, select the Header
Field in the Location column. Notice a down arrow to the right of the
Location column. Click the down arrow and select where you want the
selected field displayed (Left, Center, Right).

Note As you change the directory information, the data displayed

changes as a preview of your selection.

6. Click the OK command button.

7. Clicking the Print command button.
8. When the Print dialog box appears, ensure the correct Printer is selected.
9. Click the OK command button.

TOPS Operating Manual 77

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

CREATING BIN REPORTS

If the study or studies that are selected when the Report Wizard starts are Binned
reports, then you will be able to select from the following list of reports. If the current
set of data doesn't contain the required data to generate a particular report, the report
will not appear in the selection list.
To find out more detail about each report, refer to the following pages:
Class Reports
Daily Class Report, on page 79
Weekly Class Report, on page 80
Monthly Class Report, on page 81
Gap Reports
Daily Gap Report, on page 83
Weekly Gap Report, on page 84
Monthly Gap Report, on page 85
Headway Reports
Daily Headway Report, on page 87
Weekly Headway Report, on page 88
Monthly Headway Report, on page 89
Length Reports
Daily Length Report, on page 91
Weekly Length Report, on page 92
Monthly Length Report, on page 93
Speed Reports
Daily Speed Report, on page 95
Weekly Speed Report, on page 96
Monthly Speed Report, on page 98
Volume Reports
Compact 15 Minute Volume Report, on page 99
Daily Volume Report, on page 100
Weekly Volume Report, on page 102
Monthly Volume Report, on page 103
Custom Reports
Multi-dimensional Report, on page 105

78 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating BIN Reports

Setting Up a Class Report

A class report studies the number of vehicles over various periods that belong to
predefined classes. Vehicle classes are defined in the Class Tree Editor, or can be
created within the data recorder, and are based on one or more of the following
criteria: number of axles, axle weights, vehicle length, and/or gross weight.

Daily Class Report

This report is available only when at least one of the selected studies includes class
data.
The Daily Class Report creates a single page in the report for each calendar day that
data was recorded during the study. Each column shows a class, and each row
shows a recording interval and the channels within it.

Options on a Daily Class Report

The options for the Daily Class Report include these settings:
Report Data Interval -- The number of options that are available in this area is
determined by what sampling rate was actually used during the study. Only periods
equal to or longer than the actual study intervals are available for the report. This
selection determines how many rows appear on each daily page. Each row shows
the number of counts that occurred (in each class) during the selected interval length.
The 'As Recorded' option simply uses the data interval that was used when the study
was configured. The 'Combine Intervals' option is not available in the Daily Class
Report.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Each interval is a period of time. This option
configures what label appears on each row, either the start time of the interval, the
ending time of the interval, or both.
Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.
Totals-All Classes -- Adds a single column at the right edge of each page of the
report, showing a vehicle count across all classes for each particular time interval and
channel.
Totals-All Channels -- Creates an "All Lanes" row at the bottom of each interval that
sums up the total vehicle count across all channels for each interval.
Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report which
provides a count total for each column (each class).
Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the total day's vehicle count is included in that class.

TOPS Operating Manual 79

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Lane Options -- This button opens a window that allows the channels to be managed
in the report. 'No combination' means that each channel will be displayed on a
separate row within each day. 'By direction' will be available if the study is configured
with directionality included, and will sum channels with the same directionality into a
single row. 'Combine all' will show a single row of data within each day, no matter
how many lanes or channels are involved. Use OK to accept the changes, or Cancel
to ignore any changes.
Save settings -- If checked when you proceed to create the report, these report
options will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Daily Class Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

Weekly Class Report

This report is available only when at least one of the selected studies includes class
data.
The Weekly Class Report creates a single page in the report for each week of class
data Each column shows a day of the week, and each row shows each class count
during each interval.

Options for a Weekly Class Report

The options for the Weekly Class Report include these settings:
Report Data Interval -- The number of options that are available in this area is
determined by what sampling rate was actually used during the study. Only periods
equal to or longer than the actual study intervals are available for the report. This
selection determines how many rows appear on each weekly page. Each row shows
the number of counts that occurred during the selected interval length (within each
class.) The 'As Recorded' option simply uses the data interval that was used when
the study was configured. The 'Combine Intervals' creates a single time period out of
the whole study.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Each interval is a period of time. This option
configures what label appears on each row, either the start time of the interval, the
ending time of the interval, or both.
Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.
Totals-All Classes -- A single row (labeled 'All Classes') is added to the bottom of
each time interval, showing the vehicle count sum of all classes during that interval.
Totals-Total Column -- Adds a single column to the right edge of each page of the
report, showing the total count for the whole week for that time period and class.

80 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating BIN Reports

Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each page of the report,
showing the total vehicle count for each day. If Total Column is also active, the
bottom right cell of the page shows the total vehicle count for the week.
Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the total week's count was counted on each day.
Totals-Daily Avg. -- Adds a single column to the right edge of each page of the report,
showing the average count for that time period and class during the entire week.
Totals-Weekday Avg. -- Adds a single column to the right edge of each page of the
report, showing the average count for that time period and class during the week day
portion of the week (Monday through Friday).
Totals-Weekend Avg. -- Adds a single column to the right edge of each page of the
report, showing the average count for that time period and class during the weekend
portion of the week. (Saturday and Sunday).
Lane Options -- Lane Options are not available, since no channel information is
displayed in this report.
Save settings -- If checked when you proceed to create the report, these report
options will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Weekly Class
Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

Monthly Class Report

This report is available only when at least one of the selected studies includes class
data.
The Monthly Class Report creates a single page in the report for each calendar
month that data was recorded during the study. Each column shows a class, and
each row shows a day's worth of data and the channels within it.

Options for a Monthly Class Report

The options for the Monthly Class Report include these settings:
Report Data Interval -- These options are not used for the Monthly Class Report. Data
is always reported on a daily basis in this report.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Not available within this report.
Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.
Totals-All Classes -- Adds a column to the right edge of each page in the report,
showing the total vehicle count in all classes during each day and in each channel.
Totals-Total Column -- No function. Use 'All Classes' instead.

TOPS Operating Manual 81

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each page of the report,
showing the total vehicle count for each class. If All Classes is also active, the bottom
right cell of the page shows the total vehicle count for the month.
Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the total month's count was included in each class.
Lane Options -- This button opens a window that allows the channels to be managed
in the report. 'No combination' means that each channel will be displayed on a
separate row within each day. 'By direction' will be available if the study is configured
with directionality included, and will sum channels with the same directionality into a
single row. 'Combine all' will show a single row of data within each day, no matter
how many lanes or channels are involved. Use OK to accept the changes, or Cancel
to ignore any changes.
Save settings -- If checked when you proceed to create the report, these report
options will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Monthly Class
Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

82 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating BIN Reports

Setting up a Gap Report

Gap reports analyze the data based on the time intervals between the end of one
vehicle and the beginning of the next vehicle.

Daily Gap Report

This report is available only when at least one of the selected studies includes gap
timing data.
The Daily Gap Report creates a separate report page for each day's worth of data,
listing the number of counts that fall into regular gap bins between vehicles for each
channel. Each bin is a quarter second wide and shows the number of gaps that were
that duration or shorter. Each set of rows displays the counts for the regular time
interval of the study. (The default is every five minutes.)

Options for the Daily Gap Report

The options for the Daily Gap Report include these settings:
Report Data Interval -- The number of options that are available in this area is
determined by what sampling rate was actually used during the study. Only periods
equal to or longer than those used in the actual study are available for the report. This
selection determines how many rows appear on each daily page. Each row shows
the number of counts that occurred during the selected interval (within each gap
timing range.) The 'As Recorded' option simply uses the data interval that was used
when the study was configured. The 'Combine Intervals' option is not available for this
study.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Each interval is a period of time. This option
configures what label appears on each row, either the start time of the interval, the
ending time of the interval, or both.
Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.
Totals-All Gaps -- A single column is added to the right edge of each page of the
report, showing the vehicle count sum across all gap times during that interval.
Totals-All Channels -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each interval, showing the
total count for all lanes during that interval.
Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each page of the report,
showing the total vehicle count in each gap range. If All Gaps is also active, the
bottom right cell of the page shows the total vehicle count for the day.
Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the day's total vehicle count were included in each gap
range.

TOPS Operating Manual 83

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Lane Options button -- This button opens a window that allows the channels to be
managed in the report. 'No combination' means that each channel will be displayed
on a separate row within each day. 'By direction' will be available if the study is
configured with directionality included, and will sum channels with the same
directionality into a single row. 'Combine all' will show a single row of data within each
day, no matter how many lanes or channels are involved. Use OK to accept the
changes, or Cancel to ignore any changes.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Daily Gap Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

Weekly Gap Report

This report is available only when at least one of the selected studies includes gap
timing data.
This report shows, for an entire week, how many vehicles during each interval fall into
each quarter-second-wide gap bin. Each column shows the number of vehicles on a
single day of the week. Each row shows the count of vehicles for a single time interval
that fit into each gap bin.

Options for a Weekly Gap Report

The options for the Weekly Gap Report include these settings:
Report Data Interval -- The number of options that are available in this area is
determined by what sampling rate was actually used during the study. Only periods
equal to or longer than the actual study intervals are available for the report. This
selection determines how many rows appear on each daily page. Each row shows
the number of counts that occurred during the selected interval (within each gap bin.)
The 'As Recorded' option simply uses the data interval that was used when the study
was configured. The 'Combine Intervals' treats the whole day as a single data set.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Each interval is a period of time. This option
configures what label appears on each row, either the start time of the interval, the
ending time of the interval, or both.
Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.
Totals-All Gaps -- A single row is added to each interval of the report, showing the
vehicle count sum across all the gap bins during that interval.
Totals-Total Column -- Adds a single column to the right side of the report, showing
the total vehicle count for the whole week for each interval/gap length combination.
Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each page of the report,
showing the total vehicle count for each day of the week.

84 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating BIN Reports

Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the week's total vehicle count were counted each day.
Totals-Daily Avg. -- This adds a column to the right edge of the report showing the
average number of vehicles detected for each time of day and gap length
combination.
Totals-Weekday Avg. -- This adds a column to the right edge of the report showing
the average number of vehicles detected for each time of day and gap length
combination during the week days of the week (Monday through Friday).
Totals-Weekend Avg. -- This adds a column to the right edge of the report showing
the average number of vehicles detected for each time of day and gap length
combination during the weekend days (Saturday and Sunday.)
Lane Options button -- This report does not differentiate data by channels, so there
are no Lane Options.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Weekly Gap Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

Monthly Gap Report

This report is available only when at least one of the selected studies includes gap
timing data.
This report shows, for an entire month on each page of the report, how many vehicles
during each interval fall into quarter-second-wide gap bins. Each column shows the
number of vehicles that were detected in each gap range. Each row shows the count
for each gap range during a single day of the month and in a particular channel.

Options for a Monthly Gap Report

The options for the Monthly Gap Report include these settings:
Report Data Interval -- There are no interval options, since the Monthly Gap Report
only looks at daily intervals.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Not used for this report, since each row
represents a day instead of a time.
Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.
Totals-All Gaps -- A single column is added to the right edge of each page of the
report, showing the vehicle count sum across all of the gap bins during that day for
each channel of data.
Totals-Total Column -- The same thing as All Gaps.

TOPS Operating Manual 85

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each page of the report,
showing the total vehicle count for each gap bin for the whole month.
Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the month's total vehicle count was detected in each gap
range.
Lane Options button -- This button opens a window that allows the channels to be
managed in the report. 'No combination' means that each channel will be displayed
on a separate row within each interval. 'By direction' will be available if the study is
configured with directionality included, and will sum channels with the same
directionality into a single row. 'Combine all' will show a single row of data within each
day, no matter how many lanes or channels are involved. Use OK to accept the
changes, or Cancel to ignore any changes.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Monthly Gap Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

86 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating BIN Reports

Setting up a Headway Report

Headway reports analyze the data based on the time intervals between the beginning
of one vehicle and the beginning of the next vehicle. (This is similar to Gap, but
Headway also includes the time a vehicle needs to travel its own length.)

Daily Headway Report

This report is available only when at least one of the selected studies includes
headway timing data.
The Daily Headway Report creates a separate report page for each day's worth of
data, listing the number of counts over intervals that fall into regular headway bins for
each channel. Each bin is predefined in the study and shows the number of headway
timings that were that duration or shorter. Each set of rows displays the counts for the
regular time interval of the study. (The default is every five minutes.)

Options for a Daily Headway Report

The options for the Daily Headway Report include these settings:
Report Data Interval -- The number of options that are available in this area is
determined by what sampling rate was actually used during the study. Only periods
equal to or longer than those used in the actual study are available for the report. This
selection determines how many rows appear on each daily page. Each row shows
the number of counts that occurred during the selected interval (within each headway
timing range.) The 'As Recorded' option simply uses the data interval that was used
when the study was configured. The 'Combine Intervals' option is not available for this
study.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Each interval is a period of time. This option
configures what label appears on each row, either the start time of the interval, the
ending time of the interval, or both.
Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.
Totals-All Headways -- A single column is added to the right edge of each page of the
report, showing the vehicle count sum across all headway times in that
interval/channel.
Totals-All Channels -- Adds an 'All Lanes' row at the bottom of each interval, showing
the total headway bin count for all lanes during that interval.
Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each page of the report,
showing the total vehicle count in each headway range.
Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the day's total vehicle count was included in each
headway range.

TOPS Operating Manual 87

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Lane Options button -- This button opens a window that allows the channels to be
managed in the report. 'No combination' means that each channel will be displayed
on a separate row within each interval. 'By direction' will be available if the study is
configured with directionality included, and will sum channels with the same
directionality into a single row. 'Combine all' will show a single row of data within each
day, no matter how many lanes or channels are involved. Use OK to accept the
changes, or Cancel to ignore any changes.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Daily Headway Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

Weekly Headway Report

This report is available only when at least one of the selected studies includes
headway timing data.
This report shows, for an entire week, how many vehicles during each interval fall into
each predefined headway bin. Each column shows the number of vehicles on a single
day of the week. Each row shows the count of vehicles for a single time interval that
fit into each headway bin.

Options for a Weekly Headway Report

The options for the Weekly Headway Report include these settings:
Report Data Interval -- The number of options that are available in this area is
determined by what sampling rate was actually used during the study. Only periods
equal to or longer than the actual study intervals are available for the report. This
selection determines how many rows appear on each week-long page. Each row
shows the number of counts that occurred during the selected interval (within each
headway bin.) The 'As Recorded' option simply uses the data interval that was used
when the study was configured. The 'Combine Intervals' treats the whole week as a
single interval.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Each interval is a period of time. This option
configures what label appears on each row, either the start time of the interval, the
ending time of the interval, or both.
Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.
Totals-All Headways -- A single row is added to each interval of the report, showing
the vehicle count sum across all the headway bins during that interval.
Totals-Total Column -- Adds a single column to the right side of the report, showing
the total vehicle count for the whole week for each interval/headway length
combination.

88 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating BIN Reports

Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each page of the report,
showing the total vehicle count for each day.
Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the week's total vehicle count were counted each day.
Totals-Daily Avg. -- This adds a column to the right edge of the report showing the
average number of vehicles detected for each time and headway combination.
Totals-Weekday Avg. -- This adds a column to the right edge of the report showing
the average number of vehicles detected for each time of day and headway length
combination during weekdays (Monday through Friday).
Totals-Weekend Avg. -- This adds a column to the right edge of the report showing
the average number of vehicles detected for each time of day and headway during
the weekend days (Saturday and Sunday.)
Lane Options button -- This report does not differentiate data by channels, so there
are no Lane Options.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Weekly Headway Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

Monthly Headway Report

This report is available only when at least one of the selected studies includes
headway timing data.
This report shows, for an entire month on each page of the report, how many vehicles
during each interval fall into each of the predefined headway bins. Each column
shows the number of vehicles that were detected in each headway range. Each row
shows the count for each headway range during a single day of the month and in a
particular channel.

Options for a Monthly Headway Report

The options for the Monthly Headway Report include these settings:
Report Data Interval -- There are no interval options, since the Monthly Headway
Report only looks at daily intervals.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Not used for this report, since each row is set to
represent a day.
Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.

TOPS Operating Manual 89

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Totals-All Headways -- A single column is added to the right edge of each page of the
report, showing the vehicle count sum across all of the headway bins during that day
for each channel of data.
Totals-Total Column -- The same thing as All Headways.
Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each page of the report,
showing the total vehicle count for each headway bin for the whole month.
Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the month's total vehicle count was detected in each
headway range.
Lane Options button -- This button opens a window that allows the channels to be
managed in the report. 'No combination' means that each channel will be displayed
on a separate row within each interval. 'By direction' will be available if the study is
configured with directionality included, and will sum channels with the same
directionality into a single row. 'Combine all' will show a single row of data within each
day, no matter how many lanes or channels are involved. Use OK to accept the
changes, or Cancel to ignore any changes.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Monthly Headway Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

90 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating BIN Reports

Setting up a Length Report

These report shows how many vehicles during each interval fall into a predefined set
of length classifications (e.g. 0-2m, 2m-4m, etc.) These length categories are defined
at the time the study is created.

Note The lengths in these reports will be displayed in whichever units

(feet or meters) are selected in the TOPS Option windows. (View
menu > Options > Units tab) The units displayed in these reports
can be changed even after they have been generated.

Daily Length Report

This report is available only when at least one of the selected studies includes length
data.
Each page of the report shows the length results for a single day. Each column shows
the number of vehicles that were going a given speed. Each row shows the count for
all speeds during a single interval and in a particular channel.

Options for a Daily Length Report

The options for the Daily Length Report include these settings:
Report Data Interval -- The number of options that are available in this area is
determined by what sampling rate was actually used during the study. Only periods
equal to or longer than those used in the actual study are available for the report. This
selection determines how many rows appear on each daily page. Each row shows
the number of counts that occurred during the selected interval (within each length
category.) The 'As Recorded' option simply uses the data interval that was used when
the study was configured. The 'Combine Intervals' option is not available for this
study.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Each interval is a period of time. This option
configures what label appears on each row, either the start time of the interval, the
ending time of the interval, or both.
Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.
Totals-All Lengths -- A single column is added to the right edge of each page of the
report, showing the vehicle count sum across all length bins during that interval.
Totals-All Channels -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each interval, showing the
total count for all lanes during that interval.
Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each page of the report,
showing the total vehicle count in each length bin. If Total Column is also active, the
bottom right cell of the page shows the total vehicle count for the day.

TOPS Operating Manual 91

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the day's total vehicle count were included in each length
bin.
Lane Options button -- This button opens a window that allows the channels to be
managed in the report. 'No combination' means that each channel will be displayed
on a separate row within each day. 'By direction' will be available if the study is
configured with directionality included, and will sum channels with the same
directionality into a single row. 'Combine all' will show a single row of data within each
day, no matter how many lanes or channels are involved. Use OK to accept the
changes, or Cancel to ignore any changes.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Daily Length Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

Weekly Length Report

This report is available only when at least one of the selected studies includes length
data.
This report shows, for an entire week, how many vehicles during each interval fall into
a predefined set of length classifications (e.g. 0-10 feet, 10-30 feet, etc.) These length
categories are defined at the time the study is created. Each column shows the
number of vehicles on a single day of the week. Each row shows the count of
vehicles for a single time interval that fit into each length bin.

Options for a Weekly Length Report

The options for the Weekly Length Report include these settings:
Report Data Interval -- The number of options that are available in this area is
determined by what sampling rate was actually used during the study. Only periods
equal to or longer than the actual study intervals are available for the report. This
selection determines how many rows appear on each daily page. Each row shows
the number of counts that occurred during the selected interval (within each length
category.) The 'As Recorded' option simply uses the data interval that was used when
the study was configured. The 'Combine Intervals' option is not available for this
study.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Each interval is a period of time. This option
configures what label appears on each row, either the start time of the interval, the
ending time of the interval, or both.
Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.
Totals-All Lengths -- A single column is added to the right edge of each page of the
report, showing the vehicle count sum across all the length bins during that interval.

92 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating BIN Reports

Totals-Total Column -- Does the same thing as the All Lengths option.
Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each page of the report,
showing the total vehicle count for each length range. If either Total Column or All
Lengths is also active, the bottom right cell of the page shows the total vehicle count
for the day.
Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the day's total vehicle count were counted in each length
bin.
Totals-Daily Avg. -- This adds a column to the right edge of the report showing the
average number of vehicles detected for a given interval at a given length throughout
the week.
Totals-Weekday Avg. -- This adds a column to the right edge of the report showing
the average number of vehicles detected for a given interval in a given length bin
during the week days of the week (Monday through Friday).
Totals-Weekend Avg. -- This adds a column to the right edge of the report showing
the average number of vehicles detected for a given interval in a given length bin
during the weekend days (Saturday and Sunday.)
Lane Options button -- This report does not differentiate data by channels, so there
are no Lane Options.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Weekly Length Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

Monthly Length Report

This report is available only when at least one of the selected studies includes length
data.
This report shows, for an entire month on each page of the report, how many vehicles
during each interval fall into a predefined set of length bins (e.g. 0-10 feet, 10-30 feet,
etc.) These length categories are defined at the time the study is created. Each
column shows the number of vehicles that were detected in each range of lengths.
Each row shows the count for each length range during a single day of the month and
in a particular channel.

Options for a Monthly Length Report

The options for the Monthly Length Report include these settings:
Report Data Interval -- There are no interval options, since the Monthly Speed Report
only looks at daily intervals.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Not used for this report, since each row
represents a day instead of a time.

TOPS Operating Manual 93

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.
Totals-All Lengths -- A single column is added to the right edge of each page of the
report, showing the vehicle count sum across all the length bins during that day for
each channel of data.
Totals-Total Column -- The same thing as All Speeds.
Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each page of the report,
showing the total vehicle count for each length bin for the whole month. If either All
Speeds or Total Column is also active, the bottom right number on the page shows
the total vehicle count for the month.
Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the month's total vehicle count were detected in each
length range.
Lane Options button -- This button opens a window that allows the channels to be
managed in the report. 'No combination' means that each channel will be displayed
on a separate row within each day. 'By direction' will be available if the study is
configured with directionality included, and will sum channels with the same
directionality into a single row. 'Combine all' will show a single row of data within each
day, no matter how many lanes or channels are involved. Use OK to accept the
changes, or Cancel to ignore any changes.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Monthly Length Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

94 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating BIN Reports

Setting Up a Speed Report

These reports are available only when at least one of the selected studies includes
speed data.

These reports show how many vehicles during each interval fall into a predefined set
of speed classifications (e.g. 0-10mph, 10-20 mph, etc.) These speed categories are
defined at the time the study is created.

Note The speeds in these reports will be displayed in whichever units

(KPH or MPH) are selected in the TOPS Option windows. (View
menu > Options > Units tab) The units displayed in a report can
be changed even after it has been generated.

Daily Speed Report

This report is available only when at least one of the selected studies includes speed
data.
Each page of the report shows the speed results for a single day. Each column shows
the number of vehicles that were going a given speed. Each row shows the count for
all speeds during a single interval and in a particular channel.

Options for a Daily Speed Report

The options for the Daily Speed Report include these settings:
Report Data Interval -- The number of options that are available in this area is
determined by what sampling rate was actually used during the study. Only periods
equal to or longer than the actual study intervals are available for the report. This
selection determines how many rows appear on each daily page. Each row shows
the number of counts that occurred during the selected interval length (within each
speed category.) The 'As Recorded' option simply uses the data interval that was
used when the study was configured. The 'Combine Intervals' option is not available
for this study.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Each interval is a period of time. This option
configures what label appears on each row, either the start time of the interval, the
ending time of the interval, or both.
Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.
Totals-All Speeds -- A single column is added to the right edge of each page of the
report, showing the vehicle count sum across all speeds during that interval.
Totals-All Channels -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each interval, showing the
total count for all lanes during that interval and having a particular speed.

TOPS Operating Manual 95

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each page of the report,
showing the total vehicle count for each speed range. If Total Column is also active,
the bottom right cell of the page shows the total vehicle count for the day.
Totals-Mean Speed -- Adds a single column to the right side of each page of the
report, showing the mean speed of all vehicles for that time period and channel.
HOWEVER, this number is only accurate if there are no vehicles counted in the top
range of the study. The reason for this is the method that is used to calculate a mean
speed for binned data. The top range has no upper bound, so the average speed of
vehicles in the top range cannot be calculated.
Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the day's total vehicle count were traveling in each speed
range.
Totals-Summary Sheet-- This option adds a page to the report for each day included
in the study. This extra page shows a summary of speed information for that day. For
more details about the summary sheet, look here. This checkbox must be checked for
the Summary button (below) to become available. Also, when the Summary Sheet
option is checked, the Total Row option is also checked automatically, and cannot be
deactivated unless Summary Sheet is deactivated first.
Summary button -- This opens the Summary Sheet Options window. It defines what
calculated values are included on each day's summary page.
Lane Options button -- This button opens a window that allows the channels to be
managed in the report. 'No combination' means that each channel will be displayed
on a separate row within each day. 'By direction' will be available if the study is
configured with directionality included, and will sum channels with the same
directionality into a single row. 'Combine all' will show a single row of data within each
day, no matter how many lanes or channels are involved. Use OK to accept the
changes, or Cancel to ignore any changes.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Daily Speed Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

Weekly Speed Report

This report is available only when at least one of the selected studies includes speed
data.
This report shows, for an entire week, how many vehicles during each interval fall into
a predefined set of speed classifications (e.g. 0-10mph, 10-20 mph, etc.) Each
column shows the number of vehicles on a single day of the week. Each row shows
the count of vehicles for a single time interval that were traveling in each speed
range.

Options for a Weekly Speed Report

The options for the Weekly Speed Report include these settings:

96 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating BIN Reports

Report Data Interval -- The number of options that are available in this area is
determined by what sampling rate was actually used during the study. Only periods
equal to or longer than the actual study intervals are available for the report. This
selection determines how many rows appear on each daily page. Each row shows
the number of counts that occurred during the selected interval length (within each
speed category.) The 'As Recorded' option simply uses the data interval that was
used when the study was configured. The 'Combine Intervals' option is not available
for this study.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Each interval is a period of time. This option
configures what label appears on each row, either the start time of the interval, the
ending time of the interval, or both.
Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.
Totals-All Speeds -- A single column is added to the right edge of each page of the
report, showing the vehicle count sum across all speeds during that interval.
Totals-Total Column -- This option inserts a column along the right side of the report
showing the sum of vehicles throughout the week that were detected during each
time interval at a given speed.
Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each page of the report,
showing the total vehicle count for each speed range. If Total Column is also active,
the bottom right cell of the page shows the total vehicle count for the day.
Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the day's total vehicle count were traveling in each speed
range.
Totals-Daily Avg. -- This adds a column to the right edge of the report showing the
average number of vehicles detected for a given interval at a given speed throughout
the week.
Weekday Avg. -- This adds a column to the right edge of the report showing the
average number of vehicles detected for a given interval at a given speed during the
week days of the week (Monday through Friday).
Weekend Avg. -- This adds a column to the right edge of the report showing the
average number of vehicles detected for a given interval at a given speed during the
weekend days (Saturday and Sunday.)
Lane Options button -- This report does not differentiate data by channels, so there
are no Lane Options.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Weekly Speed Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

TOPS Operating Manual 97

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Monthly Speed Report

This report is available only when at least one of the selected studies includes speed
data.
This report shows, for an entire month on each page of the report, how many vehicles
during each interval fall into a predefined set of speed classifications (e.g. 0-10mph,
10-20 mph, etc.) Each column shows the number of vehicles that were going a given
speed. Each row shows the count for each speed range during a single day of the
month and in a particular channel.

Options for a Monthly Speed Report

The options for the Monthly Speed Report include these settings:
Report Data Interval -- There are no interval options, since the Monthly Speed Report
only looks at daily intervals.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Not used for this report since each row represents
a day, instead of a time.
Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.
Totals-All Speeds -- A single column is added to the right edge of each page of the
report, showing the vehicle count sum across all speeds during that day for each
channel of data.
Totals-Total Column -- The same thing as All Speeds.
Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each page of the report,
showing the total vehicle count for each speed range for the whole month. If either All
Speeds or Total Column is also active, the bottom right number on the page shows
the total vehicle count for the month.
Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the month's total vehicle count were traveling in each
speed range.
Lane Options button -- This button opens a window that allows the channels to be
managed in the report. 'No combination' means that each channel will be displayed
on a separate row within each day. 'By direction' will be available if the study is
configured with directionality included, and will sum channels with the same
directionality into a single row. 'Combine all' will show a single row of data within each
day, no matter how many lanes or channels are involved. Use OK to accept the
changes, or Cancel to ignore any changes.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Monthly Speed Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

98 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating BIN Reports

Setting up a Volume Report

These reports are available as long as any binned data file is selected. Volume
reports are the basic report format for Binned data.

Compact 15 Minute Volume Report

The Compact 15 Minute Volume Report is the basic report for binned data. It provides
a summary of all of the data in one or more binned studies by providing vehicle
counts for each channel for every 15 minute period throughout the study duration. It
generates a separate report page for each day's worth of data. It also provides hourly
and daily totals, for each channel of data, as well as peak volume for both AM and
PM hours of each day.

Options for the Compact 15 Minute Volume Report

The options for the Compact 15 Minute Volume Report include these settings:
Include Day Total-- The standard Compact 15 Minute Volume Report displays counts
for each channel (Lane) separately on the same sheet. If this box is checked, TOPS
creates a separate page in the report to show the sums of all lanes of traffic over the
same time intervals.
Remove leading and trailing zero counts -- If the data file includes hours or days of
zero counts, this option removes those values from the report. The report only begins
listing values at the first non-zero count value, and stops reporting after the last non-
zero count value.
Limit report to first 48 hours of data -- As the title suggests, if this box is checked, the
resulting report only includes two days worth of data. Any additional data is discarded
by the report.
Peak Hour Formula -- Refer to the discussion on the next page for details.
Do not "wrap" data -- Wrapping data is the process of copying data from either the
end of the sample period or from the next day to complete the beginning of the first
sample day. This option tells the report not to wrap data. In this case, the report will
be generated with blanks at the beginning of the first sample day and at the end of
the last (unless the equipment was set up promptly at midnight, and removed
promptly at midnight, an unlikely proposition at best.)
Wrap first 24 hours as day 1 -- This option wraps data from the beginning of day 2
into the blank period at the beginning of day 1. Then the blank period at the beginning
of day 2 is filled with day 3 data, and so on. Any unmatched data from the end of the
last day of sampling is discarded from the report.
Wrap last days data to complete day 1 -- This option wraps data only from the
beginning of the last sampling day, to fill in the blank period at the beginning of the
first sampling day. Intermediate days are not modified. This option, in conjunction with
the 'Limit report to first 48 hours of data' option, is the most commonly used version
of this report.

TOPS Operating Manual 99

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Printing options -- If checked, each page of the report is sized so that it will fit onto a
standard 8½" × 11" printed page.
Save settings -- If checked when you proceed to create the report, these report
options will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Compact 15 Minute
Volume Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

Peak Hour Formula

The Peak Hour Factor (or ‘PHF’) is often used to judge the flow state of a roadway
under its most heavy usage. There are two methods available in TOPS to calculate
the PHF value that appears on the Compact 15-Minute Volume Report: the Highway
Capacity Manual 2000 method and the Simple Method.
HighWay Capacity Manual Formula
The Highway Capacity Manual 2000 is a standards document available from the
Transportation Research Board. It can be ordered from their website at
http://www.trb.org/. In this method, the PHF is defined as:

V
PHF =
4 × V15
where V = the hourly volume in vehicles per hour, and V15 is the volume during the
peak 15 minute period of the peak volume hour (in vehicles per 15 minute period.)
Simple Formula
The other method used within TOPS to calculate a PHF value is called the ‘simple
formula’. In this method, PHF is defined as:

C60 Max
PHF =
CT
Where C60Max is the largest vehicle count for any 60 minute period during the entire 24
hour day, and CT is the total vehicle count for the day.

Note Ideally, C T should be an annualized average for the day, but such
a figure is not available within TOPS.

100 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating BIN Reports

Daily Volume Report

This report is available as long as any binned data file is selected. A Volume report is
the simplest ADR report, concisely listing the number of vehicles detected per time
period. Each page of this report shows the results for a single day of the studies that
are involved.

Options for a Daily Volume Report

The options for the Daily Volume Report include these settings:
Report Data Interval -- The number of options that are available in this area is
determined by what sampling rate was actually used during the study. Only periods
equal to or longer than the actual study intervals are available for the report. This
selection determines how many rows appear on each daily page. Each row shows
the number of counts that occurred during the selected interval length. The 'As
Recorded' option simply uses the data interval that was used when the study was
configured. The 'Combine Intervals' creates a single time period out of the whole
study.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Each interval is a period of time. This option
configures what label appears on each row, either the start time of the interval, the
ending time of the interval, or both.
Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.
Totals-All Channels -- Creates an "All Lanes" column that sums up the total vehicle
count across all channels for each interval.
Totals-Peak Summary -- Adds four rows to the bottom of each page of the report,
providing the peak AM and PM volume counts, as well as the time periods when peak
volumes were measured.
Totals-12 to 24 Summary -- Adds four rows to the bottom of each page of the report,
providing volume counts for four particular time ranges for the day: the 7am to 5pm
period, the 6am to 10pm period, 6am to midnight, and finally midnight to midnight.
Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report which
provides a count total for each column.
Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the total day's count is included in each column.
Totals-Direction Totals -- If the study is configured with directionality in mind (i.e. each
channel or lane is assigned a direction such as 'North') then, on each page, a column
is added for each direction that is involved in the study. For example, if three lanes
are 'northbound', then a 'North' column provides the total traffic volume of all three
lanes.
Lane Options -- Lane options are not available in the Daily Volume Report.

TOPS Operating Manual 101

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Save settings -- If checked when you proceed to create the report, these report
options will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Daily Volume
Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

Weekly Volume Report

This report is available as long as any binned data file is selected. In the Weekly
version of this report, each page of the report shows the results for a week-long
period of the studies that are involved. Columns show the results for each day of the
week, and rows show the results for each channel within each time period.

Options for a Weekly Volume Report

The options for the Weekly Volume Report include these settings:
Report Data Interval -- The number of options that are available in this area is
determined by what sampling rate was actually used during the study. Only periods
equal to or longer than the actual study intervals are available for the report. This
selection determines how many rows appear on each daily page. Each row shows
the number of counts that occurred during the selected interval length. The 'As
Recorded' option simply uses the data interval that was used when the study was
configured. The 'Combine Intervals' creates a single time period out of the whole
study.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Each interval is a period of time. This option
configures what label appears on each row, either the start time of the interval, the
ending time of the interval, or both.
Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.
Totals-All Channels -- Adds a row to the bottom of every interval with the label 'All
Lanes'. This shows the total vehicle count during the interval on all channels.
Totals-Total Column -- Adds a single column to the right edge of each page of the
report, showing the total count for the whole week for that time period and channel.
Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each page of the report,
showing the total vehicle count for each day. If Total Column is also active, the
bottom right cell of the page shows the total vehicle count for the week.
Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the total week's count was counted on each day.
Totals-Daily Avg. -- Adds a single column to the right edge of each page of the report,
showing the average count for that time period during the entire week.

102 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating BIN Reports

Totals-Weekday Avg. -- Adds a single column to the right edge of each page of the
report, showing the average count for that time period during the week day portion of
the week (Monday through Friday).
Totals-Weekend Avg. -- Adds a single column to the right edge of each page of the
report, showing the average count for that time period during the weekend portion of
the week. (Saturday and Sunday).
Lane Options -- This button opens a window that allows the channels to be managed
in the report. 'No combination' means that each channel will be displayed on a
separate row within each time interval. 'By direction' will be available if the study is
configured with directionality included, and will sum channels with the same
directionality into a single row. 'Combine all' will show a single row of data within each
interval, no matter how many lanes or channels are involved. Use OK to accept the
changes, or Cancel to ignore any changes.
Save settings -- If checked when you proceed to create the report, these report
options will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Weekly Volume
Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

Monthly Volume Report

This report is available as long as any binned data file is selected. In the Monthly
version of this report, each page of the report shows the results for an entire month.
Columns show the hour-by-hour results, and rows show the results for each day and
channel in the data set.

Options for a Monthly Volume Report

The options for the Monthly Volume Report include these settings:
Report Data Interval -- These options are not used for the Monthly Volume Report.
Data is always reported on an hourly basis in this report.
Report Interval Heading Formats -- Each interval is a period of time. This option
configures what label appears on each row, either the start time of the interval, the
ending time of the interval, or both.
Printing Options -- The individual pages of the report can be fitted to printed pages in
either the horizontal or vertical directions, or both. Selecting both can make the data
appear very small on the printed page, unless the report happens to be shaped
approximately like a Letter-sized page.
Totals-All Channels -- Adds a row to the bottom of every interval with the label 'All
Lanes'. This shows the total vehicle count during the interval on all channels.
Totals-Total Column -- Adds a single column to the right edge of each page of the
report, showing the total count for the whole week for that time period and channel.

TOPS Operating Manual 103

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Totals-Total Row -- Adds a single row at the bottom of each page of the report,
showing the total vehicle count for each day. If Total Column is also active, the
bottom right cell of the page shows the total vehicle count for the week.
Totals-Percent Row -- Adds a single row to the bottom of each page of the report
which lists what percent of the total week's count was counted on each day.
Lane Options -- This button opens a window that allows the channels to be managed
in the report. 'No combination' means that each channel will be displayed on a
separate row within each day. 'By direction' will be available if the study is configured
with directionality included, and will sum channels with the same directionality into a
single row. 'Combine all' will show a single row of data within each day, no matter
how many lanes or channels are involved. Use OK to accept the changes, or Cancel
to ignore any changes.
Save settings -- If checked when you proceed to create the report, these report
options will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Monthly Volume
Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

104 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating BIN Reports

Setting up a Multi-Dimensional Report

The Multi-Dimensional Report option only becomes available if at least one binned
data report is among those selected. However, a Multi-Dimensional Report is different
than the other binned data reports that are available in TOPS. The other binned data
reports are basically 'pre-packaged' arrangements of data on a 2 dimensional
spreadsheet, such as speed vs. time, or length vs. time, or headway vs. time. But
what if one wants to compare length vs. speed, and see how that varies over time?
For that situation, you need a customizable multi-dimensioned report.
In a TOPS Multi-Dimensional report, you can specify up to four axes of data to
analyze. The first is always Time, but the other three are up to you. Because of this,
unlike the other binned reports, you MUST choose some information before a report
can be generated. You need to choose what will be included as the other dimensions
of the report. They are called 'Headings' in this wizard. Take a look at the Multi-
dimensional Report Wizard window to see how this is done.

Note The Multi-Dimensional Report Wizard will allow one to select time
intervals and headings that are not available in the selected study
files. If this is done, when the operator chooses to create the
report, a blue line of text will appear in the Message Log,
indicating the problem.

Figure 6 – Multi-dimensional Report Wizard window

Time Interval Format

Time intervals are a range. As with the options of the other reports, the Multi-
Dimensional report can show intervals as either the start time, the end time, or both.

TOPS Operating Manual 105

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Axes options
These are the axes that can be selected for either Heading 1, 2 or 3 of the
Multidimensional report. If you don't want to use one of the headings, set it to None,
which appears at the top of the list.
Heading 1 — This is the second dimension of your Multi-dimensional report.
Heading 2 — This is the third axis of your Multi-dimensional Report.
Heading 3 — This defines the fourth axis of your Multi-Dimensional Report.

Page layout setting

These control determine how the report will appear on a printout. These settings are
applied to individual 'pages' of the report, which show up as separate tabs.

Create Report(s) button

Tells TOPS to go ahead and create the report based on the current Heading, page
layout, time interval and axes settings.

106 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating PVR Reports

CREATING PVR REPORTS

If the study or studies that are selected when the Report Wizard is launched are PVR
studies, then you will be presented with the following list of PVR reports. If the current
set of data does not include the required data to generate a particular kind of report,
the report doesn't appear on the selection list.
Each page of the report appear on a tab at the top of the report area. If there are
more tabs than can appear on one screen, the remaining tabs can be accessed by
using the left and right arrows at the top left corner of the report area.
To find out more detail about each report, refer to the following pages:

Individual PVR Records Report, on page 108

PVR Stats Report, on page 109
PVR Weekly GVW Report, on page 112
PVR Hourly GVW Report, on page 113
GVW Summary Report, on page 114
Esals by Class by Hour Report, on page 110
Auto Calibration Factor Report, on page 111
Weight Violations Report, on page 115
Weight Violations by Class Report, on page 116
Weight Violations Summary Report, on page 117

Note The PVR reports all include a statistics page, which is the tab
farthest to the right at the top of the report area.

TOPS Operating Manual 107

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Setting Up an Individual PVR Records Report

This report is available only when all of the selected studies includes PVR data.
As the title suggests, this report lists the individual per vehicle records in the study.
Each row represents a detected vehicle and each column is one parameter recorded
by the detector array. Each tab in the report shows the vehicles detected on single
day in a particular class.

Options on an Individual PVR Records Report

As with all of the PVR Reports provided with TOPS, there are a great many ways to
customize the report. The tabs available in the report Options window are listed
below. The purpose of these tabs are to format the way data appears on the listing,
filter which vehicles will or will not appear based on a variety of criteria, and define
parameters used in calculations.
When running the Report Wizard, you have the option to Create Report immediately,
or continue to the Next window to see these options. And as usual, after a report has
been generated, you can tweak it by clicking the Options button.
Default Units -- Select the weight, length, speed and temperature units on the report
fields.
Classes -- Select which classes of vehicle will be included in the report.
Display Settings -- Select which channels (or directions), daily averages and totals,
and start and ending times are used.
Individual PVR Field Selection -- Choose which of the PVR fields to show for each
vehicle.
Status Filters -- When active, this filter shows only vehicles that meet a set of vehicle
status requirements. Some detectors provide status information about individual
records, such as possible tail-gating vehicles, invalid vehicles, etc.
Violation Filters -- When active, this filter can be used to show (or hide) vehicles that
have violated certain rules, such as overweight, speed, or by using the bridge
formula.
Filter Definitions -- These define what constitutes a violation by setting overweight,
speed, wheel imbalance, and other parameters.
ESAL Settings -- When using Equivalent Single Axle Loads to calculate Roadway Life
Capacity based on these real-world roadway usage measurements, this is where key
parameters are entered to make the calculations.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the Individual PVR Records
Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

108 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating PVR Reports

Setting up a PVR Stats Report

This report is available only when all of the selected studies includes PVR data.
This report generates individual pages that show the key statistics of the PVR data for
each day and class of the study. Each of these pages shows the axle weight and
spacing, ESAL, and speed statistics for all of the vehicles in that class on that day.

Options on a PVR Stats Report

As with all of the PVR reports provided with TOPS, there are a great many ways to
customize the report. The tabs available in the report Options window are listed
below. The purpose of these tabs are to format the way data appears on the listing,
filter which vehicles will or will not appear based on a variety of criteria, and define
parameters used in calculations.
When running the Report Wizard, you have the option to Create Report immediately,
or continue to the Next window to see these options. And as usual, after a report has
been generated, you can tweak it by clicking the Options button.
Default Units -- Select the weight, length, speed and temperature units on the report
fields.
Classes -- Select which classes of vehicle will be included in the report.
Display Settings -- Select which channels (or directions), daily averages and totals,
and start and ending times are used.
Status Filters -- When active, this filter shows only vehicles that meet a set of vehicle
status requirements. Some detectors provide status information about individual
records, such as possible tail-gating vehicles, invalid vehicles, etc.
Violation Filters -- When active, this filter can be used to show (or hide) vehicles that
have violated certain rules, such as overweight, speed, or by using the bridge
formula.
Filter Definitions -- These define what constitutes a violation by setting overweight,
speed, wheel imbalance, and other parameters.
ESAL Settings -- When using Equivalent Single Axle Loads to calculate Roadway Life
Capacity based on these real-world roadway usage measurements, this is where key
parameters are entered to make the calculations.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the PVR Stats Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

TOPS Operating Manual 109

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Setting up a PVR - ESALs by Class by Hour Report

This report is available only when all of the selected studies includes PVR data.
Provides Equivalent Single Axle Load values for roadway life capacity calculations.
This report shows hour-by-hour calculations of ESALs for each vehicle class, and
then provides vehicles counts and Total ESALS for the day and for each class.

Options on a PVR-ESALs by Class by Hour Report

As with all of the PVR Reports provided with TOPS, there are a great many ways to
customize the report. The tabs available in the report Options window are listed
below. The purpose of these tabs are to format the way data appears on the listing,
filter which vehicles will or will not appear based on a variety of criteria, and define
parameters used in calculations.
When running the Report Wizard, you have the option to Create Report immediately,
or continue to the Next window to see these options. And as usual, after a report has
been generated, you can tweak it by clicking the Options button.
Default Units -- Select the weight, length, speed and temperature units on the report
fields.
Classes -- Select which classes of vehicle will be included in the report.
Display Settings -- Select which channels (or directions), daily averages and totals,
and start and ending times are used. This is also the place where a graph of the data
can be requested. This graph appears at the bottom of the report and can be resized
manually.
Status Filters -- When active, this filter shows only vehicles that meet a set of vehicle
status requirements. Some detectors provide status information about individual
records, such as possible tail-gating vehicles, invalid vehicles, etc.
Violation Filters -- When active, this filter can be used to show (or hide) vehicles that
have violated certain rules, such as overweight, speed, or by using the bridge
formula.
Filter Definitions -- These define what constitutes a violation by setting overweight,
speed, wheel imbalance, and other parameters.
ESAL Settings -- When using Equivalent Single Axle Loads for LTPP analyses based
on these real-world roadway usage measurements, this is where key parameters are
entered to make the calculations.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the ESALs by Class by Hour
Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

110 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating PVR Reports

Setting up a PVR Auto Calibration Factor Report

This report is available only when all of the selected studies includes PVR data.
The Auto Calibration Factor Report records the auto calibration settings over time of
an array of Weigh-in-Motion (WIM) sensors. Auto calibration is used by ADR WIM
sensors to account for the speed and temperature dependency of WIM sensors. It
uses certain assumptions about vehicles of different classifications to automatically
calibrate the sensor, especially in a setting where temperature measurements are not
available.

Options on a PVR Auto Calibration Factor Report

As with all of the PVR Reports provided with TOPS, there are a great many ways to
customize the report. The tabs available in the report Options window are listed
below. The purpose of these tabs are to format the way data appears on the listing,
filter which vehicles will or will not appear based on a variety of criteria, and define
parameters used in calculations.
When running the Report Wizard, you have the option to Create Report immediately,
or continue to the Next window to see these options. And as usual, after a report has
been generated, you can tweak it by clicking the Options button.
Default Units -- Select the weight, length, speed and temperature units on the report
fields.
Display Settings -- Select which channels (or directions), daily averages and totals,
and start and ending times are used. This is also the place where a graph of the data
can be requested. This graph appears at the bottom of the report and can be resized
manually.
Calibration Report Options -- Decide what sample size (number of vehicles) to use to
calculate the calibration factor, and whether or not to include temperature in the
report.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the PVR Auto Calibration
Factor Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

TOPS Operating Manual 111

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Setting up a PVR Weekly GVW Report

This report is available only when all of the selected studies includes PVR data.
For each vehicle class, this report creates a page showing how many vehicles fit into
a set of gross vehicle weight bins for an entire week.

Options on a PVR Weekly GVW Report

As with all of the PVR Reports provided with TOPS, there are a great many ways to
customize the report. The tabs available in the report Options window are listed
below. The purpose of these tabs are to format the way data appears on the listing,
filter which vehicles will or will not appear based on a variety of criteria, and define
parameters used in calculations.
When running the Report Wizard, you have the option to Create Report immediately,
or continue to the Next window to see these options. And as usual, after a report has
been generated, you can tweak it by clicking the Options button.
Default Units -- Select the weight, length, speed and temperature units on the report
fields.
Classes -- Select which classes of vehicle will be included in the report.
Display Settings -- Select which channels (or directions), daily averages and totals,
and start and ending times are used. This is also the place where a graph of the data
can be requested. This graph appears at the bottom of the report and can be resized
manually.
GVW Bin Limits -- Create the vehicle weight bins that become the rows in the report.
Status Filters -- When active, this filter shows only vehicles that meet a set of vehicle
status requirements. Some detectors provide status information about individual
records, such as possible tail-gating vehicles, invalid vehicles, etc.
Violation Filters -- When active, this filter can be used to show (or hide) vehicles that
have violated certain rules, such as overweight, speed, or by using the bridge
formula.
Filter Definitions -- These define what constitutes a violation by setting overweight,
speed, wheel imbalance, and other parameters.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the PVR Weekly GVW Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

112 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating PVR Reports

Setting up a PVR Hourly GVW Report

This report is available only when all of the selected studies includes PVR data.
For each day and class, shows hour-by-hour how many vehicles fit into each of a set
of gross vehicle weight bins.

Options on a PVR Hourly GVW Report

As with all of the PVR Reports provided with TOPS, there are a great many ways to
customize the report. The tabs available in the report Options window are listed
below. The purpose of these tabs are to format the way data appears on the listing,
filter which vehicles will or will not appear based on a variety of criteria, and define
parameters used in calculations.
When running the Report Wizard, you have the option to Create Report immediately,
or continue to the Next window to see these options. And as usual, after a report has
been generated, you can tweak it by clicking the Options button.
Default Units -- Select the weight, length, speed and temperature units on the report
fields.
Classes -- Select which classes of vehicle will be included in the report.
Display Settings -- Select which channels (or directions), daily averages and totals,
and start and ending times are used. This is also the place where a graph of the data
can be requested. This graph appears at the bottom of the report and can be resized
manually.
GVW Bin Limits -- Select Gross Vehicle Weight parameters such as minimum,
maximum, and bin size.
Status Filters -- When active, this filter shows only vehicles that meet a set of vehicle
status requirements. Some detectors provide status information about individual
records, such as possible tail-gating vehicles, invalid vehicles, etc.
Violation Filters -- When active, this filter can be used to show (or hide) vehicles that
have violated certain rules, such as overweight, speed, or by using the bridge
formula.
Filter Definitions -- These define what constitutes a violation by setting overweight,
speed, wheel imbalance, and real-world roadway usage measurements, this is where
key parameters are entered to make the calculations.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the PVR Hourly GVW Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

TOPS Operating Manual 113

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Setting up a GVW Summary Report

This report is available only when all of the selected studies includes PVR data.
Provides a concise listing of how vehicles in a particular class fit into a set of gross
vehicle weight bins. Similar to the PVR Weekly GVW Report, but only shows a single
day's data on each report page.

Options on a GVW Summary Report

As with all of the PVR Reports provided with TOPS, there are a great many ways to
customize the report. The tabs available in the report Options window are listed
below. The purpose of these tabs are to format the way data appears on the listing,
filter which vehicles will or will not appear based on a variety of criteria, and define
parameters used in calculations.
When running the Report Wizard, you have the option to Create Report immediately,
or continue to the Next window to see these options. And as usual, after a report has
been generated, you can tweak it by clicking the Options button.
Default Units -- Select the weight, length, speed and temperature units on the report
fields.
Classes -- Select which classes of vehicle will be included in the report.
Display Settings -- Select which channels (or directions), daily averages and totals,
and start and ending times are used. This is also the place where a graph of the data
can be requested. This graph appears at the bottom of the report and can be resized
manually.
GVW Bin Limits -- Select Gross Vehicle Weight parameters such as minimum,
maximum, and bin size.
Status Filters -- When active, this filter shows only vehicles that meet a set of vehicle
status requirements. Some detectors provide status information about individual
records, such as possible tail-gating vehicles, invalid vehicles, etc.
Violation Filters -- When active, this filter can be used to show (or hide) vehicles that
have violated certain rules, such as overweight, speed, or by using the bridge
formula.
Filter Definitions -- These define what constitutes a violation by setting overweight,
speed, wheel imbalance, and real-world roadway usage measurements, this is where
key parameters are entered to make the calculations.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the GVW Summary Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

114 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating PVR Reports

Setting up a PVR Weight Violations Report

This report is available only when all of the selected studies includes PVR weight
data.
This report allows one to define what constitutes a variety of weight violations, and
then see how many vehicles were detected that failed the test. The report displays a
separate page for each date and vehicle class, each showing the number of vehicles
that violated the configured weight rules.

Options on a PVR Weight Violations Report

As with all of the PVR Reports provided with TOPS, there are a great many ways to
customize the report. The tabs available in the report Options window are listed
below. The purpose of these tabs are to format the way data appears on the listing,
filter which vehicles will or will not appear based on a variety of criteria, and define
parameters used in calculations.
When running the Report Wizard, you have the option to Create Report immediately,
or continue to the Next window to see these options. And as usual, after a report has
been generated, you can tweak it by clicking the Options button.
Default Units -- Select the weight, length, speed and temperature units on the report
fields.
Classes -- Select which classes of vehicle will be included in the report.
Display Settings -- Select which channels (or directions), daily averages and totals,
and start and ending times are used. This is also the place where a graph of the data
can be requested. This graph appears at the bottom of the report and can be resized
manually.
Status Filters -- When active, this filter shows only vehicles that meet a set of vehicle
status requirements. Some detectors provide status information about individual
records, such as possible tail-gating vehicles, invalid vehicles, etc.
Violation Filters -- When active, this filter can be used to show (or hide) vehicles that
have violated certain rules, such as overweight, speed, or the bridge formula.
Filter Definitions -- These define what constitutes a violation by setting overweight,
speed, wheel imbalance, and other parameters.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the PVR Weight Violations
Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

TOPS Operating Manual 115

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Setting up a PVR Weight Violations by Class Report

This report is available only when all of the selected studies includes PVR data.
This report allows weight violations to be defined and then provides a count of the
number of vehicles in each class that fail each rule. Each row in the report shows the
weight-based violations for a single class of vehicles. Each column shows the counts
for a particular type of weight violation (i.e. "Tandem") or the statistics for this class
(i.e. total count, % in violation).

Options on a PVR Weight Violations by Class Report

As with all of the PVR Reports provided with TOPS, there are a great many ways to
customize the report. The tabs available in the report Options window are listed
below. The purpose of these tabs are to format the way data appears on the listing,
filter which vehicles will or will not appear based on a variety of criteria, and define
parameters used in calculations.
When running the Report Wizard, you have the option to Create Report immediately,
or continue to the Next window to see these options. And as usual, after a report has
been generated, you can tweak it by clicking the Options button.
Classes -- Select which classes of vehicle will be included in the report.
Display Settings -- Select which channels (or directions), daily averages and totals,
and start and ending times are used.
Definitions -- This is where you can set filters on the data, and also define what
constitutes a violation.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the PVR Weight Violations by
Class Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

116 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating PVR Reports

Setting up a PVR Weight Violations Summary Report

This report is available only when all of the selected studies includes PVR weight
data.
This report allows weight violations to be defined and then provides a count of the
number of vehicles for the whole study that fail each rule.

Options on a PVR Weight Violations Summary Report

As with all of the PVR Reports provided with TOPS, there are a great many ways to
customize the report. The tabs available in the report Options window are listed
below. The purpose of these tabs are to format the way data appears on the listing,
filter which vehicles will or will not appear based on a variety of criteria, and define
parameters used in calculations.
When running the Report Wizard, you have the option to Create Report immediately,
or continue to the Next window to see the following options. And as usual, after a
report has been generated, you can also tweak it by clicking the Options button.
Classes -- Select which classes of vehicle will be included in the report.
Display Settings -- Select which channels (or directions), daily averages and totals,
and start and ending times are used.
Definitions -- This is where you can set filters on the data, and also define what
constitutes a violation.
Save settings -- If checked when you go on to create the report, the current settings
will be recorded and become the standard settings for the PVR Weight Violations
Summary Report.
Header -- Opens the Header Editor Window.

TOPS Operating Manual 117

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

CONFIGURATION SCREENS FOR PVR REPORTS

The PVR reports can be modified using the screens described in the following sections.

Default Units Tab

Weight -- Determines how weight-based stats (such as AWn and Gross) will be
displayed in the report. 'Kips', for anyone who doesn't know, are kilopounds, or
thousands of pounds. 'Metric tons' are thousands of kilograms. 1kg=2.2 pounds.
Length -- Determines how length-based measurements (such as WBn and LPL) are
displayed in the report. 'Deci-feet' are tenths of feet, or 1.2 inches. 1m=39.37 inches.
Speed -- Speed measurements in the report will be shown the selected velocity units:
millimeters per second, kilometers per hour, or miles per hour.
1KPH=0.621MPH=278mm/sec.
Temperature -- Temperature measurements in the report appear in either degrees
Fahrenheit or degrees Celcius. C = 5/9×(F-32). Freezing = 0°C = 32°F. Boiling =
100°C = 212°F.

Classes Tab
All -- All classes of vehicles will be included in the report.
User Selected -- If this radio button is chosen, then only the classes that are
highlighted in the list below will be included in the report. You can use SHIFT-click to
select ranges of entries and CTRL-click to select or deselect individual items in the
list.
Combine Class Selection -- If this checkbox is checked, then all of the currently
selected classes that will be included in the report will be treated as a single set of
data. (Acting like one giant class.)

Display Settings Tab

Lane Combination -- This selection determines how channel data will be used in the
report.
Day Combination -- Determines how data from different days will be handled in the
report, separated on different pages, totaled on a single page, or averaged to create a
'virtual' day.
Time Start End -- These settings can be used to limit the data included in the report
to only that which was recorded between these two times.
Include Graph -- On some of the reports, this option creates a graph at the bottom of
each report page. It graphs the key information in a color-keyed format. The graph
can be selected and moved around and resized on the Report page. (Note: if you
need extra room on which to move or resize the graph, resize some of the report's
columns.)

118 TOPS Operating Manual

 Configuration Screens for PVR Reports

Field Selection Tab

The items that are checked on this tab will appear as columns in the report.
Date -- The date (as stored in the ADR) that the vehicle was detected.
Time -- The time of day that the vehicle was detected.
Array -- Indicates which array of detectors (which channel) detected the vehicle.
Flow -- Indicates the direction that this vehicle was moving relative to the lane's
normal traffic flow: Forward or Reverse.
Status -- A hexadecimal representation of two binary status bytes. Indicates the
status of the detection array at the time of the vehicle detection
Road Temperature -- Shows the current temperature of the roadway (in the units
selected on the Default Units tab of the Report Options) if the array has a thermistor
installed.
Vehicle Number -- A simple integer that is raised by one every time a vehicle is
detected during the study. Each vehicle detected during the study has a unique
vehicle number.
Class -- If vehicle classes are configured within the ADR, this shows the class
assigned to the vehicle based on weight, axle count, axle weights and distribution,
etc.
Speed -- The speed of the vehicle in the units selected in the Default Units tab of the
Report Options, but only if the array has a speed detection capability.
LPL (Loop Length) -- The length of the loop that detected this vehicle. Depends on
which array detected the vehicle.
Number of Axles -- The ADR attempts to differentiate between vehicles at least
partially by grouping axles into vehicles based on detection patterns for a variety of
vehicle layouts. This is the number of axles (or sets of wheels) that the ADR
considers belong to this vehicle.
WB1-WBn -- The length of the wheelbases between each axle on the vehicle. WB1
indicates the distance between axle 1 and 2, WB2 indicates the distance between
axles 2 and 3, and so on.
WBL -- The total wheelbase (in the units selected on the Default Units tab of the
Report Options) between the first and last axle of this vehicle.
AW1-AWn -- The actual axle weights detected for each axle of the vehicle, in
whatever Weight unit is selected in the Default Units tab of the Report Options.
Gross Weight -- The sum of all actually detected axle weights for the vehicle.
Sum(AW1,,AWn)
Individual Axle ESALs -- The calculated equivalent single axle loads of each axle on
the vehicle, based on the ESALs Settings configured in the Report Options.

TOPS Operating Manual 119

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Gross ESAL -- The calculated equivalent axle loads for the entire vehicle, based on
the ESALS calculations for each axle on the vehicle.
WW1-WWn -- If the ADR is connected to a special wheel-sensing array, it can also
calculate the weights of individual wheels, rather than whole axles.

Status Filters Tab

The vehicles included in the report can be filtered by certain status situations that may
be detected by the ADR array.
Include All Vehicles -- This bypasses the status filter and includes all vehicles.
Include/Exclude -- These two options tell the filter whether to include or exclude
vehicles that meet your selected criteria from the report.
Valid/Invalid Vehicles -- The first two just tell the report to filter based on whether the
vehicle is considered valid or not (from a status aspect). The User Selected option
allows you to select which status fields (to the right) to use in the filter.
And/Or -- If User Selected status indicators are used for filtering, these two buttons
tell the filter to either only filter vehicles that meet all of the checked conditions (AND)
or any of the checked conditions (OR).
Unbalanced Axles -- The arrangement of axle weights cannot be interpreted as a
known type of vehicle.
Classed by Default -- If the ADR cannot tell what type of vehicle it is from the
arrangement of axles and their weights, the ADR may have been configured to put it
into a default class.
Vehicle Off Scale -- In a sensor array that includes an older 'small' WIM sensor, this
bit indicates that the vehicle actually went over the WIM sensor.
Tail Gate Vehicle -- The Tailgating algorithm available in some ADR units may be
able to differentiate a tailgating vehicle from a tandem vehicle that just happens to
have a few extra axles. If it thinks it is a tailgating vehicle, it throws this status flag.
No Speed -- The vehicle is detected, but no speed calculation can be performed from
the available data, so an average value is used based on traffic flow.
Lag Sensor -- The lead and lag sensors detect a different number of axles for this
vehicle. Usually, the ADR accepts the lower number as the real number.
No Loops Activated -- An anomaly where only part of the array detects the vehicle.

Violation filters Tab

Violations are any statistics of the vehicle that fails a test. The criteria for the test are
defined on the Filter Definitions tab. If the data file does not include the data that is
being used as the basis for the filter (e.g. filtering on GVW when the file includes no
GVW data), the filter will be ignored (after an alert is presented to the operator.)

120 TOPS Operating Manual

 Configuration Screens for PVR Reports

Include All Vehicles -- This bypasses the violation filter when checked. All vehicles
will be included in the report. The rest of the controls on this screen only become
available to edit when this checkbox is UNCHECKED.
Include/Exclude -- These two options tell the filter whether to include or exclude
vehicles that meet your selected violations from the report.
Valid/Invalid Vehicles -- The first two just tell the report to filter based on whether the
vehicle is considered valid or not (from a violations perspective). The User Selected
option allows you to select which violations (at right) to use in the filter.
And/Or -- If User Selected violations are used for filtering, these two buttons tell the
filter to either only filter vehicles that failed all of the checked conditions (AND) or any
of the checked conditions (OR).
Overweight Wheel -- If wheel sensors are installed as part of the array, this tests to
see if any wheel is more than the Wheel:Max Weight listed on the Filter Definitions
pane of the Report Options.
Overweight Axle -- Tests to see if any wheel is more than the Axle: Max Weight
listed on the Filter Definitions pane of the Report Options.
Overweight Tandem -- Tests to see if tandem axles are either too close together
(Tandem:Spacing) or too heavy (Tandem: Max Weight).
Overweight Triple -- Tests to see if triple axles are either too close together
(Triple:Spacing) or too heavy (Triple: Max Weight).
Overweight Quad -- Tests to see if quad axles are either too close together
(Quad:Spacing) or too heavy (Quad: Max Weight).
Overweight Gross -- Tests to see if the gross vehicle weight is too heavy (Gross:
Max Weight).
Bridge Formula -- Tests to see if the vehicle fails the Federal Bridge Formula (U.S.)
Wheel Imbalance -- Tests the Wheel Imbalance ratio to check for loads located too
much on one side of the vehicle.
Over Max Speed -- Tests for vehicles traveling over the Speed:Max setting on the
Filter Definitions pane.
Under Min Speed -- Tests for vehicles traveling slower than the Speed:Min setting on
the Filter Definitions pane.

Filter Definitions Tab

This tab is where the violations tested on the Violation Filters tab are defined. The
conditions that cause a vehicle to fail a test are set here. The units of all values on
this page use the units defined on the Default Units tab. The units are indicated at the
bottom of each column of values. The controls on this screen only become available
to edit when the ‘Include All Vehicles’ checkbox on the Violation Filters tab is
UNCHECKED.

TOPS Operating Manual 121

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Speed -- If All is checked, no speed violations are indicated. Min is the slowest speed
allowed and Max is the highest. Used by the Under Min Speed and Over Max Speed
violation tests, respectively.
# Axles -- Used for the general Valid/Invalid violation test. If the box is checked, no
violations are indicated.
GVW -- Defines a minimum and maximum gross vehicle weight. If the box is checked,
no violations are indicated.
Wheel Imbalance -- If the box is checked, no violations are indicated. Defines the
maximum percentage of imbalance before a violation is called.
Wheel -- Defines the maximum weight for a wheel (if wheel sensors are installed as
part of the array.)
Axle -- Defines the maximum axle weight for any axle on a vehicle.
Tandem -- Defines the maximum combined weight for any pair of axles on a vehicle.
Also defines the minimum spacing between a pair.
Triple -- Defines the maximum combined weight for any trio of axles on a vehicle.
Also defines the minimum spacing between such a trio.
Quad -- Defines the maximum combined weight for any foursome of axles on a
vehicle. Also defines the minimum spacing between such a quad.
Gross -- Defines the maximum weight allowed for the entire vehicle before a violation
is called. Note that the GVW setting to the left can limit the vehicles displayed to a
range of weights, and then this can indicate (within that range) what vehicles are over
the weight threshold.

ESAL Settings Tab

These are the values used by the report to calculate Equivalent Single Axle Loads.
ESALs are typically used in longterm calculations to determine a roadway's life
capacity.
Rigid/Flexible -- Select whether the roadway has a rigid or flexible surface.
Structural Number (Sn) -- The structural strength of the asphalt that makes up a
roadway. Only required for Flexible surfaces.
Pavement Thickness (D) -- The thickness of the roadway pavement in inches. Only
required for Rigid surfaces.
Serviceability (Pt) -- Serviceability is the ability of a specific section of pavement to
serve traffic in its existing conditions. The lowest serviceability that motorists can
tolerate, before rehabilitation, resurfacing or reconstruction, is called terminal
serviceability (Pt). Pt is commonly 2.5 for major highways and around 2.0 for low
volume roads. Only required for Flexible surfaces.

122 TOPS Operating Manual

 Exporting Data

EXPORTING DATA
Just as with most of its modules and data methods, TOPS’ method of managing data
export is intended to be modular and configurable. Out of the box, TOPS typically is
installed with a couple of standard export formats: comma-delimited text files, and
PRN data files compatible with the old 241 product line. Beyond that, TOPS also has
extra export modules which allow data to be stored in TMG compliant files, as well as
several other formats. If you have an export need that is not currently supported in the
installed version of TOPS, contact your Quixote Traffic sales representative to find out
about additional export options.

Generating an Export
1. Open the Data Explorer -- Select Station View.
2. Click the Next command button. The Data Explorer -- Study View tab is
displayed.
3. Select the data from either the Study View or Calendar View that you want to
use in your report.
4. Click the Export Wizard button.
Or select File from the menu bar, select Export from the drop-down menu.
5. Review the instructions on the Export Wizard window. Click the Next
command button.

Figure 7 – Export Wizard window

6. Select one or more of the export data types listed on the Select Export window.

TOPS Operating Manual 123

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

Note To export the data without displaying the rest of the wizard or
viewing the data, check the box labeled "Run export in unattended
mode". The default settings are applied and the export is not
displayed but sent directly to the printer.

7. Click the Next command button to modify the options for the selected export, if
applicable. If the selected Exports does not have options, this Next command
button is disabled.
8. Click the Finish command button.
9. Review the instruction on the Introduction Screen. Click the Next command
button.
10. You may modify the Output File settings. Click the Next command button.
11. Review the selections displayed for the PRN report. To edit the information
displayed, click the Back command button and edit the options displayed.

Or

Click the Finish command button to export the data.

Export Options
The output of an export can be modified using the Options window for TOPS exports.
This screen appears as part of the export wizard, if the selected report has options
available. The following example shows the options for a TMG export.

124 TOPS Operating Manual

 Exporting Data

Figure 8 – Export Options window

TMG File Generation area:

These contols tell the export wizard how you want the files separated in this export:
by day, by week, or by month. If you select “week”, you must select which day of the
week you want your week to begin.
There are four file-naming schemes available for the export:
1. Have the system prompt you so you can name each exported file.
2. Have the system automatically name the file for you with a short TMG
Standard name (example: FL01.xxx).
3. Have the system automatically name the file for you, using the state, date, and
site information for the station (example: MFLSep01_012345_456789.xxx).
4. Have the system automatically name the file using the LTPP file naming
convention. The Longterm Pavement Performance naming convention was
added to the TMG Export in TOPS v3.7. The naming scheme is described in
the program directive: http://www.ltpp.org/dirs/P-22.pdf. An SHRP ID, or six-
digit LTPP identification number, is assigned to the file based on the station’s
information. The first two characters of the SHRP ID is the state ID, so this
option requires that the station’s State field has been filled. Options are
provided for the user to select whether the the last four numbers in the SHRP
ID are based on the first or last four characters of either the site ID or station
number.

TOPS Operating Manual 125

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

General Export Settings

Combine lanes in same direction: To have the export combine the lanes flowing in
the same direction, check this box.
Export partial days’ data (nonstandard): If only a part of a day’s data has been
recorded, the information is usually not exported. If you would like this information
exported, check this box.
Save Settings: Check this box if you want the above settings retained for future use.

Export File Path

The displayed file path is the default of where your export will be placed. To change
this information, you may either type in the file path, or click the Browse command
button to locate the file folder you want the export stored in.

126 TOPS Operating Manual

 Exporting Data

Generating PRN Exports of All New Data

One commonly requested feature of TOPS is to be able to batch export multiple new
data files to PRN files. This is the procedure to accomplish this:
1. Go to the Data Explorer - Select Station window in TOPS and make sure the
Show new data only checkbox is checked at the bottom of the window.
2. Press CTRL-A to select all stations.
3. PRN exports only work for binned data. If any of the stations provide PVR data
(shown in the Type of Data column) deselect them using CTRL-click. If many
PVR stations need to be removed from the selection, consider using a Station
filter instead.
4. Choose Next to go to the Study View.
5. Make sure the Show new data only checkbox is selected at the bottom of the
window.
6. Press ctrl-A to select all studies in the list.
7. Go to the File menu and choose Export.
8. In the Export Wizard window, select PRN Daily Export from the list, and make
sure the Run export in unattended mode (export will not be displayed)
checkbox is checked.
9. Select the Create Export(s) button.
10. The exported PRN files will automatically be saved to your selected PRN
export location. (The default location for PRN exports is the Export folder in the
directory where TOPS was installed, typically C:\Program Files\Peek
Traffic\TOPS.)
Each PRN file will be named based on the start date of each study, followed by a .prn
extension.

Tip If you have any problems exporting any of the studies, highlight
the selected study and rerun the export, this time turning off the
Run export in unattended mode checkbox..

Additional Information about Exports

There is much more information about TOPS exports in the TOPS help system.

TOPS Operating Manual 127

Chapter 6 — Creating Reports and Exporting Data

128 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 7 — Configuring TOPS Operations

This chapter describes the methods that can be used to configure the overall operation of the
TOPS software. The following topics are discussed in detail in this chapter:

• Overview of TOPS options, on page 130.

• Showing and hiding the introduction screen, on page 130.
• Configuring exit to request confirmation, on page 130.
• Enabling filters upon TOPS startup, on page 131.
• Importing data automatically, on page 131.
• Selecting a default wizard, on page 131.
• Selecting a format for report labels, on page 132.
• Selecting measurement units, on page 133.
• Using the Add-in Manager, on page 134.

TOPS Operating Manual 129

Chapter 7 — Configuring TOPS Operations

OVERVIEW
The operation of TOPS can be modified using its Options screen, located on the View
menu.

Figure 9 – TOPS Options screen

The four tabs in the Options dialog box can be used to configure the general
operation of TOPS, configure the units of measurement used within the program, and
to modify the general appearance of reports and export outputs. The rest of the topics
in this chapter describe how to perform normal configuration operations within TOPS.

SHOWING/HIDING THE INTRODUCTION SCREEN

You may elect to have the TOPS Introduction screen displayed each time you run the
program, or it can be hidden from view. These steps will allow you to toggle the
Introduction screen on or off.
1. Select View from the menu.
2. Select Options from the drop-down menu. The Options dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select the General Tab, if it is not displayed.
4. Check the box labeled "Show intro screen".
5. Click the OK command button.

CONFIGURING EXIT CONFIRMATION

You may elect to have a popup window confirm you want to close the TOPS program
when you exit.

130 TOPS Operating Manual

 Enabling Filters When Starting TOPS

1. Select View from the menu.

2. Select Options from the drop-down menu. The Options dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select the General Tab, if it is not displayed.
4. Check the box labeled "Confirm exit".
5. Click the OK command button.

ENABLING FILTERS WHEN STARTING TOPS

You may elect to have a popup window confirm you want to enable the filter when the
TOPS program is started.
1. Select View from the menu.
2. Select Options from the drop-down menu. The Options dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select the General Tab, if it is not displayed.
4. Check the box labeled "Confirm Filter Enabling".
5. Click the OK command button.

IMPORTING DATA AUTOMATICALLY

You may elect to have TOPS import data automatically when the system downloads.
You must follow these procedures prior to downloading the data in order for the
system to import it at the same time.
1. Select View from the menu.
2. Select Options from the drop-down menu. The Options dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select the General Tab, if it is not displayed.
4. Check the box labeled "Import Files after download".
5. Click the OK command button.

SELECTING THE DEFAULT WIZARD

In the Data Explorer - Study View, you may select which wizard is enabled when you
click the Next command button.
1. Select View from the menu.
2. Select Options from the drop-down menu. The Options dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select the General Tab, if it is not displayed.

TOPS Operating Manual 131

Chapter 7 — Configuring TOPS Operations

4. Select the wizard you prefer to start when the Next command button is clicked
in the Study View window.
5. Click the OK command button.

SELECTING THE REPORT LABEL FORMAT

You may select the format of the Channel labels in a Report.
1. Select View from the menu.
2. Select Options from the drop-down menu. The Options dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select the Labels Tab.
4. Select the type of label you prefer.
5. If you would like the direction included in the label, check the box labeled
Include direction. Then select whether you want the full direction description
displayed or the abbreviation.
6. Click the OK command button.

CHANGING AGENCY AND USER NAMES ON REPORTS

By default, TOPS stored the Agency Name and Registered User names that were
entered during the installation of TOPS into the fields that print out on reports. These
settings are stored for each user account in the system and can be modified by each
user separately.

Figure 10 – Agency and Registered User name settings for reports

To change these settings, follow these steps:

132 TOPS Operating Manual

 Selecting Measurement Units

1. Make sure to log in as a user that has the right to change his password. If you
do not have those rights, you will not be able to modify the names that appear
on reports.
2. Open the View menu.
3. Select the Reports tab.
4. Type in the names to be printed on the reports generated from this user
account in the Agency Name and User Name fields.
5. Click OK to save the settings.

SELECTING MEASUREMENT UNITS

You may select the types of measure used for length, speed, and weight with the
data in the TOPS program.
1. Select View from the menu.
2. Select Options from the drop-down menu. The Options dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select the Units Tab.
4. Select the type of measure you prefer.
5. Click the OK command button.

TOPS Operating Manual 133

Chapter 7 — Configuring TOPS Operations

USING THE ADD-IN MANAGER

The Add-In Manager allows you to enable or disable any of the available add-in
programs. To access the Add-In Manager:
1. Select Add-Ins from the menu.
2. Select Add-In Manager from the drop-down menu. The Add-In Manager
dialog box is displayed.
3. There are three options for adding/removing the displayed Add-Ins using the
check boxes:

a.) Load On Startup: Check this box to have the selected add-in load onto your
computer the next time TOPS is run and all subsequent times.
b.) Loaded: Check this box to have the add-in loaded immediately upon
clicking either the Apply command button or the OK command button.
c.) Load on Startup and Loaded: You may elect to click both check boxes so
you starting working with the Add-Ins immediately and have them
automatically load when you restart your computer.

Note When you select an Add-In from the list box, a description of it’s
function is displayed below.

4. The Options command button will become enabled when a add-in that has an
options page is selected. Clicking this will enable you to set the options of the
selected add-in module without launching it.
5. Click the OK command button to apply the changes made.

134 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 8 — Working with an
ADR-6000 in TOPS

This chapter explains how to use the TOPS software package to interact with an
ADR-6000 unit. The following topics are discussed in detail in this chapter:
• Launching TOPS , on page 136.
• Connecting to an ADR-6000 Through TOPS, on page 137.
• Creating a Study for the ADR-6000, on page 142.
• Downloading a Study to the ADR-6000, on page 153.
• Monitoring the Activity of an ADR-6000, on page 154.
• Retrieving Data from an ADR-6000, on page 156.

TOPS Operating Manual 135

Chapter 8 — Working with an ADR-6000 in TOPS

OVERVIEW
This document explains the basic operation of TOPS with the ADR6000. It assumes
that TOPS has already been installed on a suitable PC or notebook, and it can
access the ADR6000 unit , either via a direct connection using a serial cable, or via
modem to a similarly outfitted ADR6000 unit. For information about installing the
TOPS software, refer to the TOPS Installation Manual (81-896).
TOPS has a large variety of functions, being designed to work with the entire range of
Quixote Traffic ADR models. It can perform report generation, data export, data
archival, and many other functions. For details about those extended capabilities,
refer to the TOPS Operating Manual (p/n 81-897).

Note Some configuration functions of the ADR6000 require a direct

connection to the unit using a Linux-based computer with terminal
software. Such interactions with the ADR6000 are highly technical and
are normally performed by Quixote Traffic personnel. Contact your
closest Quixote Traffic representative or distributor for assistance.

Launching TOPS to Access an ADR-6000

If properly installed on a Windows system, follow these steps to launch the TOPS
program:
1. Go to the Windows Start menu and open the Programs set.
2. In the Peek group, select the TOPS program.
3. If it asks for a License key, enter the information. It should have been supplied
by Quixote Traffic customer support . It will only require this information once.
If you are using a 30 day demonstration copy, click Continue to enter the
program.
4. Enter your username and password. Select OK to enter TOPS.
5. After loading components, the TOPS Data Explorer window will appear. A
wizard will guide you through selecting a Station (an ADR device) to focus on,
and a Study (data set) to investigate.

Note At this point, the ADR6000 unit does not need to be attached to the
computer, either locally or via modem. The TOPS software is initially
only concerned with the stations and data stored in its own database.

At this point, TOPS is up and running. Refer to the next section, “Connecting to an
ADR-6000 Through TOPS” for more details about connecting with an ADR6000 unit.

136 TOPS Operating Manual

 Connecting to an ADR-6000 Through TOPS

CONNECTING TO AN ADR-6000 THROUGH TOPS

TOPS can either deal with data its already retrieved from an ADR device, or it can
connect with a unit and monitor the operation directly, retrieving data as required. In
either case, at some point you have to make a connection between TOPS and the
device.
TOPS maintains information about how to connect with any ADR installations you
may be tracking, either portable or permanent installations. It keeps track of these
units, which it calls ‘Stations’, in its database. The method used to connect to the
ADR-6000 depends on whether the unit is already stored in the TOPS database or
not.
To create a new ADR-6000 station in TOPS, refer to page 138.
To connect to an existing ADR-6000 station, refer to page 141.

Direct Connect vs. Modem Connect

The process for creating the ADR-6000/TOPS connection also depends on what type
of connection you will be making. There are two methods available to establish it: a
direct cable connection between the PC and the ADR-6000, or a dialup modem
connection.
The direct connection requires that a DB9 null-modem cable (female DB9 to female
DB9 cable, with a null-modem cross wiring) is plugged into both the PC and the ADR
unit. This can be ordered as Quixote Traffic part number 81-296-A.

Note Although the ADR-6000 is fitted with an IP protocol port (RJ-45), the
TOPS v3.0.9 software does not yet have the capability to establish
an IP connection to an ADR device.

A modem connection can be established between TOPS and the ADR-6000 as long
as both the TOPS PC and the ADR-6000 unit are fitted with modems. They must both
also have access to a live phone line, i.e. they have be able to ‘hear’ a dial tone.
If using the modem connection, the PC and the ADR-6000 each need to be
connected to their respective live phone lines using a standard RJ-11 phone cable.
And you will also need tonow the phone number that the PC will have to call to reach
the ADR-6000.

TOPS Operating Manual 137

Chapter 8 — Working with an ADR-6000 in TOPS

Creating a New ADR-6000 Station in TOPS

Use this procedure when connecting to an ADR-6000 unit that has not yet been
entered in the TOPS station database.
1. Make sure that the PC and the ADR-6000 are powered up and have the proper
communications cabling installed, either phone cords for a modem connection
or a direct cable for a local connection.
2. Start TOPS and log in.
3. Proceed to the Data Explorer – Select Station window.
4. Create a new station row in the Station table. There are several ways to do
this: right-click in the window and choose New Station, go to the Edit menu
and choose New Station, or you can do it by pressing the INSERTey.
The new station will appear as a blank yellow row at the bottom of the list.
5. Enter a Site ID, Station Number and a Station Name for this ADR-6000 unit.
Failure to enter at least a Site ID and a Station Number will result in the new
row being deleted automatically.
6. Double-click in the Station Type box and type in Permanent.
7. Double-click in the Type of Unit box and select ADR6000/IDRIS from the pull-
down list.

8. Double-click on the Connection Parameters box and press the additional

details button. This will open the Connection Parameters dialog box.
9. In the Connection Type pull-down box, select either Modem or Direct Cable.
The window will change to show the parameters required to make that type of
connection.

138 TOPS Operating Manual

 Connecting to an ADR-6000 Through TOPS

Figure 11 —Parameters for a modem connection to an ADR-6000

Figure 12 —Parameters for a local connection to an ADR-6000

10. The ADR-6000 requires a username and password be supplied when logging
in. ADR-6000s are delivered from the factory with the following default
username and password assigned:
username: root
password: wombat15

TOPS Operating Manual 139

Chapter 8 — Working with an ADR-6000 in TOPS

If you’d like to have those changed for security reasons, contact your local
Quixote Traffic service representative. Otherwise, enter those values into the
fields in the Connection Parameters window.
11. If creating a Modem connection to your ADR-6000, fill in the Country code,
Area Code, and Phone Number required to reach the unit. The Country code
should have been picked up from your system’s settings. Leave it at the default
value, unless the unit you are calling is in a different country. In such a case,
refer to the international calling code listings provided by the International
Telecommunications Union if you are uncertain of the calling code for the
desired country.
International Telecommunications Union code reference web site:
http://www.itu.int/itudoc/itu-t/ob-lists/icc/e164_763.html

If creating a Direct Cable (i.e. Local) connection to your ADR-6000, fill in the
logical comm port value for the serial port where the direct cable is plugged
into your computer. Also fill in the preferred Baud rate of the port. The correct
value for an ADR-6000 connection is 38400.
12. Once all the parameters are configured, click OK.
The connection information will appear in the Connection Parameters box for
this station. A direct connection will show the port number and baud rate. A
modem connection will show the phone number required to dial the unit.
13. Enter the City, County, State, Country and Description information for the
ADR-6000, if desired.
14. With your new ADR-6000 station highlighted in the station list, select one of the
connection buttons on the COMMS toolbar to interact with the device.

Open ADR Commander

Read new files
Retrieve all files from the ADR-6000
Retrieve specific file(s) from the ADR-6000

Figure 13 — ADR-6000 device connection options in TOPS

Follow the directions shown to retrieve files.
The ADR Commander can be used to set up and download studies, configure
vehicle classes, and monitor live operations. Refer to the other sections of this
manual for more details on using the ADR Commander with the ADR-6000.

140 TOPS Operating Manual

 Connecting to an ADR-6000 Through TOPS

Connecting to an Existing ADR-6000 Station in TOPS

Use this procedure if you want to connect to an ADR-6000 unit that has already been
entered into the TOPS station database.
1. Make sure that the PC and the ADR-6000 are powered up and have the proper
communications cabling installed, either phone cords for a modem connection
or a direct cable for a local connection.
2. Start TOPS and log in.
3. Proceed to the Data Explorer – Select Station window.
4. With the desired ADR-6000 station highlighted in the station list, select one of
the connection buttons on the COMMS toolbar. These trigger a connection to
the unit and will allow you to interact with the device.

Open ADR Commander

Read new files
Retrieve all files from the ADR-6000
Retrieve specific file(s) from the ADR-6000

Figure 14 — ADR-6000 device connection options in TOPS

Follow the directions shown to retrieve files.
The ADR Commander can be used to set up and download studies, configure
vehicle classes, and monitor live operations.

TOPS Operating Manual 141

Chapter 8 — Working with an ADR-6000 in TOPS

CREATING A STUDY FOR THE ADR-6000

A ‘study’ in TOPS parlance is a file or set of files that are sent to an ADR device and
tell it what kind of information to gather and how to organize the resulting data.
Configuring studies are done in TOPS using one of its Add-In modules, namely ADR
Commander.

Introduction to Study Configuration

ADR Commander is used to create, edit, delete, upload, download, export, and import
study configuration files. The ability to work with such files is implemented via a add-
in for the ADR Commander. If you do not have this add-in and you need it in order to
work with your ADR devices, contact your Quixote Traffic distributor or representative
to request the additional feature.
Studies can be configured whether the target ADR unit is online or offline, however
upload and downloading of the resulting study files is only possible when the device is
communicating with the TOPS/ADR Commander PC.

142 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating a Study for the ADR-6000

Using the Study Configuration Interface

The Study Configuration portion of the ADR Commander is accessible using the “tree
structure” pane at the left edge of the ADR Commander window. The Study Config
item brings up the Study Summary window. Any studies currently configured in
memory or on an attached device show up as Study items below the Study Config
heading in the tree.

Study Summary Window

The study summary screen is shown below. This screen is displayed when the user
selects the “Study Config” node in the ADR Commander’s tree structure, or when the
currently selected study node is no longer valid (e.g. the user just deleted that study).

Figure 15 — ADR Commander Summary Screen

Site ID—The Site ID is an alphanumeric value used to reference the site (physical
location) at which the data collection equipment is installed. It is 12 characters long,
and can be modified by typing the desired value into the Site ID textbox.
Station Number—The Station Number is an alphanumeric value used to reference
the station number for the data collection equipment. If there are multiple stations at
the same site, this is the mechanism used to differentiate between them. Like the Site
ID, It is 12 characters long, and can be modified by typing the desired value into the
Station Number textbox.
Study Interval—Binned data is data that has been summarized by time and the
configured heading(s). Binned studies collected concurrently all share the same

TOPS Operating Manual 143

Chapter 8 — Working with an ADR-6000 in TOPS

recording interval. To select the desired recording interval, choose the appropriate
value from the drop down list.
Load—To load an existing set of study configurations from disk, click on the button
labeled “Load”. You will be prompted for a filename. If the file is a valid ADR setup file
it will be loaded, and the screen updated to show the study or studies contained in
that file.
Get from unit—If you are online with a unit, clicking this button will retrieve the
current study configuration from the remote unit.
Send to unit—If you are online with a unit, clicking this button will send the current
study configuration to the ADR. But you should be aware: sending a new study to the
unit will also halt any currently running studies and restart the ADR-6000 with the
new study setup file.
Save—To save the current set of studies to a file suitable for sending to an ADR, click
on the “Save” button. You will be prompted for a filename. Unless the operation is
cancelled, the current set of studies will be saved to the specified file.
Add—This button is used to add another study to run concurrently with the existing
defined studies. The button will be disabled if the maximum number of studies for the
currently selected unit type has been reached. For the ADR 6000, the maximum
number of concurrently running studies is 8, but only three can be downloaded using
the TOPS software. The ADR 1000/2000/3000 will support up to 8 concurrent studies.
Delete—To delete a study from the study configuration view, select the study you
wish to delete, then click the button marked “Delete”. The delete button will not be
enabled if there is no study selected.
Editing a study—There are two ways to select a study for editing. Either double-click
on the desired study in the study summary grid, or select the study in question from
the Commander’s tree view structure.

Note It may be necessary to double-click on the “Study Config” node to

see its child nodes.

144 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating a Study for the ADR-6000

Study Details Window

The individual study screen (shown below) is displayed when editing a particular
study. It displays more information than the study configuration summary screen – in
particular the limit information.

Figure 16 —Typical Study Details window

Modifying headings—To modify a heading type, or to change the limit information,
click on the appropriate “Edit Heading” button. The heading modification form will
be shown allowing you to change the settings as desired. More information about
using the heading modification screen can be found below.
Delete Study—If desired, the entire study can be deleted from this screen by clicking
the “Delete Study” button. Doing so will return you to the main study configuration
screen.

Editing Headings
The heading modification screen (see below) is used to select the type of heading,
and configure heading limits. Once the information has been modified, it can be
accepted by clicking “OK”. If no edits are required, clicking the “Cancel” button will
return to the individual study screen.

TOPS Operating Manual 145

Chapter 8 — Working with an ADR-6000 in TOPS

Figure 17 — Typical Heading Editing dialog box

Heading Type—The type of heading is selected from the drop down box. Only valid
heading types are displayed. Using the same heading more than once in a study is
not permitted. If you have already used a heading type in a previous heading it will
not be available in the list. If you change a heading to the same type as one of the
later headings, the second instance will be removed. The four headings available for
an ADR6000 are Channel, Class, Speed, and Length.

Example If the current study configuration is class by speed by length

the available options for heading 3 will not include class or
speed. If heading 1 is modified to speed, the duplicate speed
information requested in heading 2 will be removed and the
study will be set to speed by length.

Number of Limits—The number of heading limits may be modified by typing in a

number, or by using the small arrows. The maximum number of limits available will
vary based on heading type. Channel and Class have a maximum of 64 limits. All
other headings have a maximum of 99 limits.

Note Use of more than 64 limits is not recommended. This is because

such files are typically used only for special purposes and cannot
be processed using TOPS.

Heading Limits—Having selected the number of limits, the limit information can be
modified by editing the upper limit values in the grid. To make editing easier,
subsequent upper limits will automatically be updated based on the preceding limit
information. For example, entering 10 MPH as the upper limit for the first speed bin

146 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating a Study for the ADR-6000

will cause each subsequent limit to be set to 10 MPH higher than its predecessor
unless that exceeds the maximum permitted value for that limit.

Example To record 10 speed bins with the following ranges – 0 to 30, 30 to

35, 35 to 40, 40 to 45, 45 to 50 etc. would only require two limits to
be entered. First, set the upper limit for the first speed bin to 30.
This will cause the upper limit for the second to be set to 60, the
third to 90, etc.
Then edit the upper limit for the second speed bin to 35. The
subsequent upper limits for the third and later bins will automatically
be set to the desired values of 40, 45, 50 etc.

Figure 18 — Set the first Upper Limit Figure 19 — Then set the second

If using the Speed heading type, you can specify either MPH for miles per hour or
KpH for kilometers per hour. The ADR-6000 will correctly interpret the change of
speed units.

TOPS Operating Manual 147

Chapter 8 — Working with an ADR-6000 in TOPS

Understanding the Logic of Headings

Headings allow the ADR-6000 to place every vehicle it records into a single counting
bin. These sorting criteria begin with the time interval, but an additional one to three
sorts can also be performed on the data. A typical study works like this:
During this time interval, whenever a vehicle is detected:
• DECIDE WHICH Heading 1 grouping it fits into,
• THEN decide which Heading 2 grouping it fits into,
• THEN decide which Heading 3 bin it fits into
• ADD one count to that bin.
A valid study requires at least a Heading 1, but Headings 2 and 3 are optional.
One thing to keep in mind about multi-heading data files . . . TOPS does not currently
have the capability to analyze three dimensional data. It may be more efficient to get
the same data using two, two-dimensional studies, rather than a single three-
dimensional study. (For example, instead of configuring a channel x class x speed
study, create a channel x class study and a channel x speed study to run side-by-
side. If a three-dimensional report is required, the data can be exported from TOPS,
and analyzed in an external spreadsheet or data analysis application.
Three-dimensional studies tend to take up more space in memory than similar two-
dimensional studies. The actual space available of the ADR-6000 must be
considered; typically it has roughly 50MB of space available to store test data. This
can quickly be used up if a three-dimensional study with 64 bins per heading is
configured.
The user should also consider the limitations placed upon the process by the ADR
Commander software itself:
No more than 64 bins can be defined for class and channel type Headings
(although 32 bins is the practical limit)
No more than 99 bins for speed and length type Headings
No more than 4096 bins TOTAL across all studies can be sent to a single
ADR-6000 (Heading 1 bin count x Heading 2 bin count x Heading 3 bin count =
4096)
And finally, no more than 128 bin limits can be defined for all studies sent to a
single ADR-6000. (Heading 1 bin count + Heading 2 bin count + Heading 3
bin count = 128)

148 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating a Study for the ADR-6000

To Add a Study to an ADR6000

This procedure describes how to use TOPS to add a measurement study to an
ADR6000. It assumes that the TOPS computer and the ADR unit can communicate
with one another, either via a direct cable connection or across a modem connection.
1. Make sure that the PC and the ADR-6000 are powered up and have the proper
communications cabling installed, either phone cords for a modem connection
or a direct cable for a local connection.
2. Start TOPS and log in. (Start menu > Programs > Peek > TOPS)
3. Proceed to the Data Explorer – Select Station window.
4. Choose the ADR6000 station you wish to configure.
5. On the Comms portion of the toolbar, click on the Open ADR Commander
button.

Open ADR Commander

Figure 20 — Launch the ADR Commander from within TOPS

6. The ADR Commander window will open after TOPS makes the connection
with the ADR6000 unit. Click on Study Config from the selection tree area at
the left side of the window. This will display the Study Summary window.

TOPS Operating Manual 149

Chapter 8 — Working with an ADR-6000 in TOPS

Figure 21 — Study Configuration Summary window

This window shows all of the studies that are currently stored on this
ADR6000. Although multiple studies can be stored to the ADR6000, they all
run on the same schedule.
7. To see what studies are currently loaded on the device, click the Get from
Unit button at the bottom of this window. The current list will appear in the
Study Summary window.

Caution Using either the Get from unit or the Load controls in the
ADR Commander window will delete any study
configurations that are currently stored in memory.

8. All currently loaded studies use the bin interval specified near the top of this
Summary window. Set the binning interval to the desired value.

Note All studies stored in the ADR unit use the same binning interval.

9. If you want to edit one of the existing studies, double-click on the desired study
in the Study Summary List. This will open the Study Detail screen.
On the other hand, if you want to create a new study for this unit, choose the
Add button at the bottom of the window.
10. The Study Detail window will appear, showing the current values for the study.

150 TOPS Operating Manual

 Creating a Study for the ADR-6000

Figure 22 — Study Details window

11. To modify a study, you can change the headings for the bins of data it
produces. These headings actually tell the unit how to organize the data it
collects. Click the Edit Heading 1 button to choose which first sort criteria to
use.

Figure 23 — Heading 1 edit dialog box

TOPS Operating Manual 151

Chapter 8 — Working with an ADR-6000 in TOPS

12. Select the type of heading to use for the first sorting of the vehicle. It can be
either Channel, Class, Speed, or Length.
13. Select the Number of Limits value. This tells the Study how many bins of this
classification to use.
14. Define the Upper Limit for each of the bins. The table is intelligent. It will
automatically suggest upper limits for any rows lower on the table whenever
you fill in any of the Upper Limit values.
15. When you are satisfied with the bins for this heading, click OK to return to the
Detail window.
16. If you wish to add a second sorting of the vehicle counts, click on the Edit
Heading 2 data and repeat the above steps to define the bins. But note that
you will not be able to use the same sorting criteria twice in a study. The list of
available types shown here will not display the classification type that was
used for Heading 1.
17. If you wish to add a third sorting criteria, select Edit Heading 3 data and
repeat the steps to define the data bins. When finished return to the Detail
window.
The following figure shows what the Detail window looks like a study is set up
with three sorting criteria. This study has been defined to look at each vehicle
and first sort it into 8 channels. These could be roadway directions or lanes.
Then for each channel, the data is further broken into 18 vehicle class bins,
and then for each class bin, the data is broken out into 8 speed bins.

Figure 24 — A typical set of study headings

18. After the study is configured as desired, return to the Study Config Summary
window by choosing Study Config in the left window. The study that was just
created or edited appears in the window to the right.
19. Now we need to send the new study to the ADR-6000. Make sure the proper
study is highlighted in the window to the right, and press the Send to unit
button.

152 TOPS Operating Manual

 Downloading a Study to the ADR-6000

20. If you are finished working with the device, shut down the ADR Commander
and TOPS.
The new study has now been created and loaded onto the ADR-6000. The device will
begin gathering data immediately. It will continue until told to stop, or a new study has
been loaded.

DOWNLOADING A STUDY TO THE ADR-6000

This procedure describes how to send a Study file to an ADR-6000.
1. Make sure that the PC and the ADR-6000 are powered up and have the proper
communications cabling installed, either phone cords for a modem connection
or a direct cable for a local connection.
2. Start TOPS and log in. (Start menu > Programs > Peek > TOPS)
3. Proceed to the Data Explorer – Select Station window.
4. Choose the ADR-6000 station you wish to configure.
5. On the Comms portion of the toolbar, click on the Open ADR Commander
button.

Open ADR Commander

Figure 25 — Launch the ADR Commander from within TOPS

6. The ADR Commander window will open after TOPS makes the connection
with the ADR6000 unit. Click on Study Config from the selection tree area at
the left side of the window. This will display the Study Summary window.
7. Select the Load button. At the prompt, select the study configuration file you
want to send to the ADR-6000.
8. To transmit the study to the device, click the Send to unit button at the bottom
of this window.
9. If you are finished working with the device, shut down the ADR Commander
and TOPS.

TOPS Operating Manual 153

Chapter 8 — Working with an ADR-6000 in TOPS

MONITORING THE ACTIVITY OF AN ADR-6000

It’s also possible to use the ADR Commander module of TOPS to monitor the real-
time activity of an ADR-6000. ADR Commander’s Monitor module allows a user to
connect with a device and view the data its generating as it’s recorded.
To accomplish real-time monitoring of an ADR-6000, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that the PC and the ADR-6000 are powered up and have the proper
communications cabling installed, either phone cords for a modem connection
or a direct cable for a local connection.
2. Start TOPS and log in. (Start menu > Programs > Peek > TOPS)
3. Proceed to the Data Explorer – Select Station window.
4. Choose the ADR-6000 station you wish to monitor.
5. On the Comms portion of the toolbar, click on the Open ADR Commander
button.

Open ADR Commander

Figure 26 — Launch the ADR Commander from within TOPS

6. The ADR Commander window will open after TOPS makes the connection
with the ADR6000 unit. Click on Monitor from the selection tree area at the left
side of the window.

Figure 27 — ADR-6000 Monitor window

154 TOPS Operating Manual

 Monitoring the Activity of an ADR-6000

7. The Monitor window can be used to check on the status of up to eight (8)
ADR-6000 loop groupings (the Loop Health boxes). It will also display vehicle
data as it is detected by the device. If you wish to store the monitored data to a
text file, choose the Open Log button and select a directory and a filename
where the data should be stored.
8. If you want to filter the information that gets shown on the screen and stored to
the log file, select the Filter Vehicles button and choose which data to make
visible.

Figure 28 — Filtering dialog box in ADR Commander’s Monitor

When you’re satisfied with your filtering choices, select Apply.
9. To begin viewing real-time data from the ADR-6000, select Start.

Note Data is filtered in the software rather than in the hardware. None of
the measured data is discarded at the device, so ongoing Studies
will not be affected by such filtering.

TOPS Operating Manual 155

Chapter 8 — Working with an ADR-6000 in TOPS

RETRIEVING DATA FROM AN ADR-6000

Once a study has been configured and downloaded to the ADR-6000, the device will
begin gathering data and storing it to a bin file on the unit. This file is named using the
date and time when the data gathering began. In order to utilize the data, it first needs
to be retrieved from the device and stored in the TOPS database.

Note By default, only data stored in completed data files are retrieved to
the TOPS PC. On the ADR-6000, that means the data up to the
previous midnight. To change the operation of data retrieval, refer to
“Understanding Data Transfer Properties” on page 158.

To retrieve and import data files

1. Make sure that the PC and the ADR-6000 are powered up and have the proper
communications cabling installed, either phone cords for a modem connection
or a direct cable for a local connection.
2. Start TOPS (Start > Programs > Peek > TOPS ) and log in.
3. Before downloading the data from the ADR unit, be sure that the automatic
import feature is enabled. This will immediately pull the data into the TOPS
database as soon as the file is downloaded.
To do this, go to the View menu and choose Options. Switch to the General
tab if necessary.

Figure 29 — TOPS Options dialog box

4. Verify that the Import files after download box is checked. If it isn’t, click on it
to insert a checkmark. Click OK to close the Options dialog box.
5. Choose the ADR-6000 unit you wish to communicate with in the
Data Explorer – Select Station list.
6. Click on the Read New Files button on the Comms toolbar.

156 TOPS Operating Manual

 Retrieving Data from an ADR-6000

Read new files

Figure 30 — Retrieve files from the device using the Comms tools
This will connect with the unit (assuming a proper physical connection can be
made) and copy the binned data files from the unit back to the TOPS
computer.

Note An alternate way to download all the new files from the device is to
right-click on the ADR-6000 unit in the Station list and choose the
Get New Files command from the pull-down menu.

To import data manually

If the automatic import feature was not enabled when the ADR-6000 data was
downloaded, the user will have to import the data files into the TOPS database as a
separate step. The file or files that were previously retrieved from the ADR unit are
stored on the TOPS PC, but they need to be loaded into TOPS before they can be
viewed, or used to generate reports.
1. With TOPS open (you do not need to be connected to the ADR-6000 to
complete this process) go to the File menu.
2. Select Import and then Selected Files. This will allow you to select the file(s)
you would like to import into TOPS. (Another way to import selected files is to
press the F4ey.)
3. Choose the file or files you would like to pull into TOPS. The program will
automatically detect the data type of the bin file and adjust the import
accordingly. If an invalid file is selected, TOPS will ignore it.

Note The default location for files downloaded from ADR units is
<TOPS install directory>\Downloads. On systems that chose the
default TOPs installation directory, downloads are stored at
C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic\TOPS\Download.

The data is now stored in the TOPS database.

TOPS Operating Manual 157

Chapter 8 — Working with an ADR-6000 in TOPS

Understanding Data Transfer Properties

The way that data is retrieved from the ADR-6000 is somewhat configurable. To view
the current data transfer properties, go to the Tools menu and open
Communications Properties Data Transfer Options.

Figure 31 — TOPS’ Data Transfer Parameters

The most important item on this parameter window is the Current File settings near
the bottom. This determines how a data retrieval deals with partial data sets. The
ADR-6000 stores its data into day files that run from midnight to midnight. These files
contain however many intervals will fit into that time period.
By default, as shown in Figure 31, retrieving the data from the ADR-6000 only
retrieves up to the most recently completed day file. The currently active day file is
only retrieved if the Include currently recording file(s) parameter is checked.

Figure 32 — Current File retrieval settings

If this box is not checked, for example, and data is retrieved from the device at
3:15pm, only the data recorded up to the previous midnight will be returned to the
TOPS computer. On the other hand, if Include currently recording file(s) is
checked and the test interval for the unit is one hour, a data retrieval will return all

158 TOPS Operating Manual

 ADR6000 Support in the ADR Monitor

data up to and including the most recently completed test interval. In this example,
that means that data up to 3:00pm will be returned, when the last test interval was
finished.
Close current file before collecting—This command relates to the previous control,
and it only becomes active when the Include currently recording file(s) control is
checked. By default, data retrieval of the current data file does not close the data file.
However, if this box is checked, the currently running test file is closed and a new file
is started. What would have been a day file running from one midnight to the next, is
split into two files at the time of the data retrieval. For example, if data is retrieved at
3:15pm as previously described, and the Close current files before collecting
parameter is checked, the previously running day file is closed. It contains the data
from midnight to 3:00pm. A new day file will be opened, and it will store data from
3:00pm until midnight. This parameter is typically only used in locations where
continuous data files are generated, such as the United Kingdom.

ADR6000 SUPPORT IN THE ADR MONITOR

When an ADR6000 is connected, the Monitor module of ADR Commander can be
used to interactively view the output of the device. The ADR600 monitor screen
replaces the standard ADR Monitor windows that appear when connected to one of
the other ADR devices. Just like the standard ADR Monitor screens, this monitor
window can be used to view vehicle detection data as it is recorded, and also to store
this data to a log file.
The ADR Monitor supports feedback from the ADR6000, but if you wish to program
the device itself for future studies, you will need to use the Study Configuration
module of ADR Commander.

Monitor Screen for the ADR6000

This window replaces the ADR Monitor screen when you connect to an ADR6000.

Figure 33 – Monitor Screen connected to an ADR-6000

TOPS Operating Manual 159

Chapter 8 — Working with an ADR-6000 in TOPS

It displays the status of the loops that are connected to the ADR-6000 at the top of
the window. Beneath that, the window displays the detection data as it is received
from the hardware. By default, this list shows all detected vehicles, along with their
classifications and other statistics. If you wish to filter this list, it can be done using
the Filter Vehicles button at the bottom of the window.

Note The data received in this window can also be sent to a log file. A
log file is a written record of events that occur as you monitor the
ADR6000.

What gets written to the log file

When the file is opened, the current time and date is written to the file.
All events that appear in the data view's list are written to the file. If the list is filtered,
only events that pass the filter requirements are stored to the log file.

ADR6000 Filter Settings

If you wish to only view a subset of the data being received by the ADR6000, the data
can be restricted to only vehicles that meet the requirements defined in the Filter
Settings dialog box. This dialog box is accessible by selecting the Filter Vehicles
button from the ADR6000 Monitor screen.

Figure 34 – Filter settings in ADR Commander for an ADR-6000

160 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 9 — TOPS Add-In: ADR Commander

This chapter introduces and explains the ADR Commander add-in module for TOPS. The
following topics are discussed in detail in this chapter:

• Introduction to the ADR Commander, on page 162.

• Using the ADR Commander interface, on page 163.
• Setting connection properties, on page 166.
• Options for the module, on page 169.

TOPS Operating Manual 161

Chapter 9 — TOPS Add-In: ADR Commander

OVERVIEW
This chapter provides a comprehensive reference to aid in the use of the ADR
Commander program and all of its add-in modules. The ADR Commander is a tool
used to connect to, configure, and monitor Quixote ADR’s and Idris-class hardware
(ADR-6000 and SmartToll). However, the ADR Commander module does not function
with 241 units.
There are three sections to the ADR commander.
Add-in Selection Tree: This list displays a list of the Automatic Data Recorders
(ADR) that may be used in conjunction with this software.
Add-in View: Click on a name from the tree view in the main window. The data
displayed in the ADR’s main window is displayed in this window.
Menus / Toolbars: This information contains detail data of the ADR.

Launching the ADR Commander

ADR Commander can be run in two ways, from within TOPS or as a standalone
application.

To start ADR Commander as a standalone application

1. Go to the Start menu and open the Programs list.
2. Open the Peek group and select ADR Commander.
3. You will be asked for a user name and password. If you don't have one,
request an account from your TOPS system administrator.

To start ADR Commander from TOPS using the Comms Toolbar

1. Make sure you are in the Select Station window of TOPS. Highlight the ADR
unit that you would like to connect with using the ADR Commander.
2. Right-click on the selected unit, and from the pull-down menu select either
Control Panel, Get Selected, Get New, or Get All. The first choice opens ADR
Commander with the ADR Control Panel Add-in active. The other three open
ADR Commander with the Data Transfer module active.
OR
1. After highlighting the desired ADR unit, you can open the ADR Commander
using the buttons in TOPS' Comms Toolbar

162 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using the ADR Commander Interface

USING THE ADR COMMANDER INTERFACE

These are the components of the ADR Commander Interface:
1. Add-in List: This area displays a list of Add-in modules that are currently
available to the ADR Commander, and if connected to one or more Automatic
Data Recorder (ADR) units, it shows the resources of each device appropriate
to each Add-in module.
2. Add-in View: This area displays the currently selected Add-in module. An Add-
in module can be selected by clicking on a name from the tree view in the main
window. The typically available Add-ins are: the ADR Control Panel, the ADR
Monitor utility, the Study Configuration tool, and the Data Transfer module.
3. Menus: The menus are used to configure and run ADR Commander, and will
also be modified when necessary by the currently open Add-in module.
4. Toolbars: This information contains detail data of the ADR.
5. Status Bar: Displays the date, time and the current state of the currently
selected Add-in.

Figure 35 – ADR Commander Interface

TOPS Operating Manual 163

Chapter 9 — TOPS Add-In: ADR Commander

Menus
The following defines each of the menus, the tools on them, and a brief description of
their function
Table 7 – ADR Commander Menus
Menu Items on drop-down menu
File Exit – Shut down the ADR Commander.
View Options – Display the general program options window.
Connection Connect to ADR – Initiate a connection with the current settings.
Disconnect – Close the current connection.
Properties – Display the connection properties window.

Toolbars
There are four toolbars at the top of the main screen just below the main menu bar.

Connection Toolbar
This toolbar has three buttons to allow you to open the connection properties window,
connect to an ADR and disconnect from an ADR. There is also a box, which displays
the current connection status.

Figure 36 – Connection Toolbar

The following messages may be displayed in the connection status box:
Not Connected – The program is not currently connected to an ADR.
Establishing Connection – The program is currently attempting to contact an ADR.
Connected – The program is actively connected to an ADR.
Terminating Connection – The program is in the process of disconnecting from an
ADR.

164 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using the ADR Commander Interface

Unit Status Toolbar

This toolbar displays basic information about the currently connected ADR. Note that
this information is only available when there is an active connection.

Figure 37 – Unit Status Toolbar

The following information is displayed upon completing a connection.
Site ID – The site ID programmed into the unit.
Station Number – The station number programmed into the unit.
ESN – The Electronic Serial Number of the unit.
Firmware – the current version of firmware in the unit.

Selected Add-in Toolbar

This toolbar displays the name of the currently selected add-in and its sub-node
where appropriate.

Figure 38 – Selected Add-in Toolbar

Add-in Controls Toolbar

This toolbar may contain additional tools added by the specific add-in modules.

Status Bar
Displays the current date and time, plus the status of the Add-in that is currently
displayed in the ADR Commander's large window.

TOPS Operating Manual 165

Chapter 9 — TOPS Add-In: ADR Commander

CONNECTION PROPERTIES
Connection Properties must be selected before you can connect to an ADR. The
type of connection to be made (modem or direct) is selected from the drop-down list
at the top.

Local/Modem Selection
Use this pull-down list on the toolbars to select what type of connection is being made
to the device. Local indicates a serial cable is physically connected to the device and
the computer. Modem indicates that communications to the device are accomplished
via a dial-up modem connection.

Local Connection Properties

When you select Local as the Type of Connection from the drop-down list, the
window appears with remote data information:

Figure 39 – Local Connection Properties window

Local Connect Example

For this example, we will assume the following: You have 10 portable units of which 8
of them are set to a speed of 19200 and the remaining 2 run at 9600. Your desktop
computer has 3 COM ports. Port 1 is connected to an external modem; ports 2 and 3
are open. On port 3 you have a cable connected which allows you to connect a
portable unit on the desk to the computer.
The logical settings for this scenario would be as follows:

Default Port = 3
Default Speed = 19200
Scan if unit not found = Yes (Checked)

166 TOPS Operating Manual

 Connection Properties

Scan Ports = 3, 2
Scan Speeds = 19200, 9600
Follow these steps to enter this information:

Select Local from the “type of connection” drop-down list

Select Com 3 from the “Port” drop-down list
Select 19200 from the “Baud Rate” drop-down list.
Check the If no remote unit is found…scan checkbox (if not already checked)
In the “Ports to Scan” list, check the box to the right of COM 2 and COM 3
With the mouse pointer over the “Com 3” row, press the left mouse button and
drag up until the row is above the “Com 2” row. Then release the mouse button.
In the “Speeds to Scan” list make sure that only the boxes to the right of 19200
and 9600 are checked. Also, use the same procedure as in the previous step to
put the speeds is the desired order (if necessary).
Check that the information entered is correct and click the OK command button
to save the settings and close the connection properties dialog.
It is most likely that a unit will be connected to COM port 3 at 19200 since 8 out of 10
units are set to that speed and port 3 is the one with the cable. However, should the
unit not be found at those default settings, chances are the unit is either running at
9600 or it may have been connected to the other free port (2).
The following list shows how the unit would be located if it were connected on COM
port 3 at 9600.
1. Try the default settings (COM 3 at 19200) – Not found
2. Start scanning first settings (Com 3 at 19200) – Skip these scan settings, as
they are the defaults and have already been attempted.
3. Continue scanning with the next settings (Com3 at 9600) – The unit will be
found.

TOPS Operating Manual 167

Chapter 9 — TOPS Add-In: ADR Commander

Modem Connection Properties

When you select Modem as the Type of Connection from the drop-down list, this
window appears with telephone data. Click anywhere on the window below for a
description of the contents.

Figure 40 – Modem Connection Properties

Modem Connection example

For this example we will assume the following: Your pc has an internal modem
(“Standard Modem”) and an external modem (“U.S. Robotics 56K Fax modem”). You
prefer to use the US Robotics. You want to connect to a remote data recorder that is
out of the local area code (at number (333) 2224444). Follow these steps to set up
this call:
1. Select the U.S. Robotics modem from the modem list.
2. The country code is automatically pulled from you computer’s locale settings,
but may be changed if necessary by selecting from the list of available
countries.
3. Type the area code into the appropriate field. This field will contain a list of all
unique area codes (including local) from each of the previously dialed
numbers.
4. Type the telephone number into the appropriate field.
5. Check that the information entered is correct and click the OK command button
to save the settings and close the connection properties dialog.

168 TOPS Operating Manual

 ADR Commander Options

ADR COMMANDER OPTIONS

The following sections of the ADR Commander interface allow the module to be
customized.

ADR Commander Options

Update Default after scan – With this option selected, the default direct connection
settings will be updated if an ADR is not found at the current defaults and is
subsequently found while scanning other speeds / com ports.
To ensure your system completes this task, select View from the menu. Select
Options from the drop-down menu. The ADR Commander Options window is
displayed. Ensure the check box is marked, then click the OK command button.

Selecting a Add-in
To select an Add-in module, click on its icon or name in the tree view on the left side
of the main window. Notice the contents of the add-in’s main window is displayed in
the add-in view.
ADR Control Panel Add-in -- Shows a virtual front panel view of the device. You
may use the buttons on your screen as you would the actual ADR unit itself. This is
the default add-in displayed by ADR Commander when it first opens.
ADR Monitor Add-in -- If the device is currently connected, this add-in shows data
being collected in real-time.
Study Config Tool -- Allows the operator to set up data collection studies, using
whatever detection options the currently selected ADR unit possesses.
Data Transfer Module -- This is the utility used by both ADR Commander and TOPS
to retrieve data files from ADR units. It can handle either binned or per-vehicle-record
(PVR) data files.

TOPS Operating Manual 169

Chapter 9 — TOPS Add-In: ADR Commander

170 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 10 — ADR Commander Add-In:
Control Panel

This chapter discusses the Control Panel add-in module for ADR Commander. The following
topics are discussed in detail in this chapter:

• Introduction to the Control Panel add-in, on page 172.

• Using the Control Panel interface, on page 173.
• Troubleshooting problems in the Control Panel viewer, on page 175.

TOPS Operating Manual 171

Chapter 10 — ADR Commander Add-In: Control Panel

OVERVIEW
The ADR control panel is a add-in module for the ADR Commander program. It is
used to access the ADR’s display remotely much the same as using its built in
keypad. Below is a picture of the add-in as it appears in the ADR commander
program’s add-in view upon startup.

Figure 41 – Basic Control Panel interface

172 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using the Control Panel Interface

USING THE CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE

Activating the Control Panel

To turn the display on, physically connect an ADR and select the ADR from the add-
in tree view on the left side of the screen. The display is automatically turned on and
has a yellow background.
The control panel is only active when you are connected to an ADR and the control
panel add-in is selected. When another add-in is selected in the add-in tree, the
display is automatically turned off. Likewise, when the control panel is selected (while
connected) the display is automatically turned on.
This is done to minimize the amount of data streaming through the connection. You
can force the display to turn off by pressing the <CTRL<Z> keys at the same time.
the “Display Off” message and the ADR’s built in keyboard and display will be
released. Press <CTRL<Z> again to re-activate the control panel add-in.

Figure 42 – ADR Control Panel add-in with display on

Mouse Operation
Once you have established a connection to an ADR, the screen will turn yellow, and
the main screen of the ADR will be displayed. From here you can operate the ADR by
clicking the buttons just as you would with a unit on your desk. The ADR can also be
driven with the computer keyboard.

Keyboard Operation
The preferred way to drive the ADR from this add-in is using the keyboard. Following
is a list of the keys and how they map to the ADR control panel. As a general rule,
the same keys on your keyboard represent the keys on the ADR.

TOPS Operating Manual 173

Chapter 10 — ADR Commander Add-In: Control Panel

Table 8 – Keyboard Controls of ADR Control Panel

Keyboard ADR Action
Esc (Escape) Return to previous screen or item. Also used to exit from the
main screen.
Enter (Return) Go to the next screen or item.
F1 (Function key) Move up on menu or perform action as specified on screen.
F2 Move down on menu or perform action as specified on screen.
F3 Move left one character (ex. Editing Site ID) or perform action as
specified on screen.
F4 Move right one character (ex. Editing Site ID) or perform action
as specified on screen.
Arrows Move up, down, left, and right as function keys above.
Numbers (0 – 9) On menus - select numbered item; in edit fields – type the
character.
Letters Type the character in an edit field (ex: Site ID)
<CTRL-Z> Toggle the display on and off. (Press the CTRL and Z keys
simultaneously)

174 TOPS Operating Manual

 Troubleshooting the ADR Control Panel

TROUBLESHOOTING THE ADR CONTROL PANEL

ADR Not Responding

Problem: The ADR does not seem to respond to every keystroke or mouse click.
Solution: This is usually a symptom of a slow or bad connection. Disconnect and
reconnect to the ADR.

Telemetry Contact...
Problem: While communicating with the ADR, the connection was lost and the ADR
still displays the message “Telemetry Contact…Keyboard Disabled”.
Solution: When a connection is made to an ADR and the control panel is driven
remotely, the ADR disables its own keypad to avoid possible conflicts. Under normal
circumstances, the keyboard is re-enabled before disconnecting. However, if the line
is dropped without warning, the program does not have a chance to release the
ADR’s keyboard. The ADR will timeout on its own after the user interface timeout
period programmed into the ADR (the default is 10 minutes). Alternatively, you may
re-contact the unit, view the display with this add-in and disconnect properly. At that
point, the ADR keyboard will be released.

Main Screen reset

Problem: In the control panel, I navigated to the count monitor, then selected
another add-in. When I returned to the control panel add-in, it had reset to the main
screen.
Solution: This behavior is by design. Keeping the control panel active while not being
viewed tends to slow down the other add-ins (especially the monitors). Therefore, the
display is automatically turned off when the control panel add-in loses focus.

TOPS Operating Manual 175

Chapter 10 — ADR Commander Add-In: Control Panel

176 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 11 — ADR Commander Add-In:
ADR Monitor

This chapter introduces the ADR Monitor add-in for ADR Commander and discusses how it is
used. The following topics are discussed in detail in this chapter:

• Introduction to ADR Monitor, on page 178.

• Using the monitor’s interface, on page 179.
• Working with LOG files in the monitor, on page 184.
• Refreshing the sensor/array view, on page 185.

TOPS Operating Manual 177

Chapter 11 — ADR Commander Add-In: ADR Monitor

OVERVIEW
The ADR Monitor add-in (for ADR Commander) allows you to view ADR events and
vehicles online. You can also generate a log file of the events. There are three basic
steps to using ADR Monitors.
1. Establish a connection with the ADR.
2. Select which arrays and types of events you would like to see. Do this by
checking / un-checking which arrays / event types you would like to see.
3. Start the monitor by pressing the Start command button.

Figure 43 – ADR Commander with ADR Monitor loaded

178 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using the ADR Monitor Interface

USING THE ADR MONITOR INTERFACE

The ADR Monitor screen is separated into three parts, as shown below.
Monitor Selection -- Select which arrays to monitor and what type of events to show.
Data View -- Displays a scrolling list of the events as they occur.
Sensor View -- Toggle between a sensor hit chart and a pictorial display of the ADR's
array configuration
Note: If working with an ADR6000, the monitor screen has a different appearance.

Figure 44 – Interface of the ADR Monitor

Monitor Selection Table

This section of the screen allows you to specify which arrays to monitor sensor and /
or vehicle events on. You may start and stop the monitors from running using the
command button. You may select the type of sensor view to the right displayed on
the right side of the screen.

TOPS Operating Manual 179

Chapter 11 — ADR Commander Add-In: ADR Monitor

Figure 45 – Monitor Selection portion of ADR Monitor

Array Column
The first row represents all arrays and allows you to select the monitor status for all of
the active arrays at one time. Each row below the first represents one active array in
the ADR and allows you to individually select the monitors for each array. This
information is only available when you are connected to an ADR.

Events Column
This column allows you to select whether or not to monitor events. At this time,
sensor events can only be monitored for all arrays. Clicking on the checkbox in the
"All Arrays" row will do this.

Vehicles Column
This column allows you to specify which arrays to monitor vehicles on. They can be
toggled individually or all at once.

Start Button
Click this button to begin receiving events from the ADR. This button has three states.

-- Disabled, not connected to an ADR.

-- Enabled, connected but not monitoring. Click to start.

-- Enabled, monitoring the ADR. Click to stop.

Sensor View Radio Buttons

Selecting either button will change the contents of the Sensor/Array View to the right.

180 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using the ADR Monitor Interface

Sensor/Array Table
If you select Arrays under Sensor View, a graphical illustration of the ADR's array
configuration is displayed during processing.

Figure 46 – Array View

Array 1 - ‘1’
This represents array 1 in the ADR. The number at the top is the array number. The
array picture shows a short long tube setup.

Array 2 - ‘2’
This represents array 2 in the ADR. The number at the top is the array number. The
array picture shows a short long tube setup.
If you select Sensor Chart, a bar chart with counts for each sensor is displayed. This
chart contains one row for each sensor for events being received. When you first
connect to the ADR, there are no sensors visible. A sensor will only be displayed
upon its first hit.

Figure 47 – Sensor Count View

TOPS Operating Manual 181

Chapter 11 — ADR Commander Add-In: ADR Monitor

There are three command buttons at the top of this view:

Clear Counts -- Clicking this while the monitors are on will reset the sensor counts to
zero as well as the bar chart.
Freeze Counts -- This button will pause the updating of the sensor count view.
Clicking it again will resume the updating of the counts
Log Counts Now -- This button will write the current sensor counts to the log file.
This is only enabled when the log file is opened.
The columns in the Sensor Count view are as follows:
Sensor ID -- This ID is identical to the ID in the sensor events listed in the data view.
It is a hexadecimal representation of the board and sensor number in the next column
and is here to help match the sensor counts to the data in the event list.
Board -- This column holds the ADR sensor board slot number and the sensor
number on that board. It is useful in identifying the position of that sensor in the ADR.
It uses the format [Board ] - [Sensor ]
Count -- This column shows the number of hits for the sensor followed by a bar graph
representation of the hit count for quick comparison with other sensors. The counts
start at zero when the monitors are turned on and will reset to zero when 9999 is
reached or the Clear Counts command button is clicked.

182 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using the ADR Monitor Interface

Event Data View

The data view at the bottom of the monitor screen is basically a scrolling list of events
from the ADR. Each new event is added to the bottom of the list. The list will contain a
maximum of 1000 events at a time at which point the top 100 are removed.
If you wish to keep a longer list to view later, you may open a log file by pressing the
button labeled "Open Log File". You can clear the events from the list by clicking the
"Clear Data" button.

Figure 48 – Event Data display in ADR Monitor

Vehicle Events
The vehicle events should appear if one or more arrays have them turned on in the
selection view. The data contained within them will vary depending on the ADR's PVR
filter settings.

Sensor Events
Sensor events should appear in the data list if the "Events" column is checked in the
"All Arrays" row.

Clear Data Button

Clicking this button will clear out all of the events from the data list.

Open Log Button

Click this button to open a log file of the data list. Click it again to close the log.

TOPS Operating Manual 183

Chapter 11 — ADR Commander Add-In: ADR Monitor

WORKING WITH LOG FILES IN ADR MONITOR

A log file is a written record of events that occur as you monitor the ADR.

What gets written to the log file?

When the file is opened, the current time and date is written to the file.
When the monitors are started, the monitor selection is written to the file. If the
monitors are running when the file is opened, the selection will be written out after the
time and date stamp.
Anytime the monitor selection is changed, it is logged to the file.
All events that appear in the data view's list are written to the file.
Clicking the "Log Counts Now" button in the sensor view will write the current sensor
count chart values to the file.

Creating a Log File

Click on the Open Log File command button in the upper right corner of the data
view.
Name the file and select a folder where it will be saved.
Click the OK command button. The file is opened. If the monitors are currently on,
the events scrolling in the data view will begin writing to the file. Notice the Log File
button is red and reads Close Log File. You may click this button at any time to close
the Log File.

Closing a Log File

Click the Close Log File button displayed in red. If the log file is open when you shut
down the ADR commander, it will be closed automatically.

184 TOPS Operating Manual

 Refreshing the Sensor / Array View

REFRESHING THE SENSOR / ARRAY VIEW

The ADR Monitor add-in adds a "Refresh" button to the add-in toolbar and a
corresponding menu item on the "Tools" menu.
Clicking this button will request a fresh set of array information from the ADR and
update the array view / monitor selection grid. This is necessary if, after connecting
to the ADR, you change its array configuration. The array view and monitor selection
grid will NOT update automatically to the new array settings programmed into the
ADR.

1. From the toolbar, click the button.

Or
1. Select Tools from the menu.
2. Select Monitors from the drop-down menu.
3. Select Refresh Arrays from the sub-menu.

TOPS Operating Manual 185

Chapter 11 — ADR Commander Add-In: ADR Monitor

186 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 12 — ADR Commander Add-In:
Study Configuration

This chapter describes the Study Configuration add-in module for ADR Commander, and
explains how it can be used. The following topics are discussed in detail in this chapter:

• An introduction to the Study Configuration add-in, on page 188.

• Using the Study Configuration interface, on page 189.
• Configuring studies in the summary screen, on page 191.
• Configuring study details, on page 193.

TOPS Operating Manual 187

Chapter 12 — ADR Commander Add-In: Study Configuration

OVERVIEW
The ADR Commander’s Study Configuration add-in allows you to create and
manipulate ADR style configuration files, such as those generated by the Setup
Wizard, or saved by the ADR 1000/2000/3000 units.
When loaded, the add-in will place an entry in the Commander’s tree structure for the
study configuration, together with a child node for each study.
The study configuration add-in can be used either online or offline. When the ADR
Commander is online with a unit, Study Configuration can be used to send the current
configuration to the remote unit, or retrieve the current configuration from it. These
are the only operations that are not available when the Commander is offline.

188 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using the Study Configuration Interface

USING THE STUDY CONFIGURATION INTERFACE

The Study Configuration module has both a Summary screen, where study
information is displayed for a particular site and station, or the Details screen, where
more information can be seen about a particular study.

Study Configuration Summary Screen

The study summary screen is shown below. This screen is displayed when the user
selects the "Study Config" node in the ADR Commander’s tree structure, or when the
currently selected study node is no longer valid (e.g. the user just deleted that study).

Figure 49 – Study Configuration Summary screen

Site ID — The Site ID is an alphanumeric value used to reference the site (physical
location) at which the data collection equipment is installed. It is 12 characters long,
and can be modified by typing the desired value into the Site ID textbox.
Station number — The Station Number is an alphanumeric value used to reference
the station number for the data collection equipment. If there are multiple stations at
the same site, this is the mechanism used to differentiate between them. Like the Site
ID, It is 12 characters long, and can be modified by typing the desired value into the
Station Number textbox.
Study Interval for Binned Data — Binned data is data that has been summarized by
time and the configured heading(s). Binned studies collected concurrently all share
the same recording interval. To select the desired recording interval, choose the
appropriate value from the drop down list.

TOPS Operating Manual 189

Chapter 12 — ADR Commander Add-In: Study Configuration

Study Config Details Screen

The individual study screen (shown below) is displayed when editing a particular
study. It displays more information than the study configuration summary screen -- in
particular the limit information.

Figure 50 – Study Configuration Details screen

190 TOPS Operating Manual

 Configuring Studies in the Summary Screen

CONFIGURING STUDIES IN THE SUMMARY SCREEN

These functions can be performed in the Summary screen of the Study Configuration
module.

Adding a Study
The "Add" button is used to add another study to run concurrently with the existing
defined studies. The button will be disabled if the maximum number of studies for the
currently selected unit type has been reached. For the ADR 6000, the maximum
number of concurrently running studies is 3. The ADR 1000/2000/3000 will support up
to 8 concurrent studies.

Deleting a Study
To delete a study from the study configuration view, select the study you wish to
delete, then click the button marked "Delete". The delete button will not be enabled if
there is no study selected.

Editing a Study
There are two ways to select a study for editing. Either double-click on the desired
study in the study summary grid, or select the study in question from the
Commander’s tree view structure.

Note It may be necessary to double-click on the "Study Config" node

to see its child nodes.

Either mechanism for selecting the study will cause the editing screen (described
below) for that study to be displayed.

Loading Study Configurations from Disk

To load an existing set of study configurations from disk, click on the button labeled
"Load". You will be prompted for a filename. If the file is a valid ADR setup file it will
be loaded, and the screen updated to show the study or studies contained in that file.

Saving Study Configurations to Disk

To save the current set of studies to a file suitable for sending to an ADR, click on the
"Save" button. You will be prompted for a filename. Unless the operation is cancelled,
the current set of studies will be saved to the specified file.

Getting Current Study Configuration(s) from a Remote Unit

If you are online with a unit, clicking the "Get from unit" button will retrieve the current
study configuration from the remote unit.

TOPS Operating Manual 191

Chapter 12 — ADR Commander Add-In: Study Configuration

Sending Study Configurations to a Remote Unit

If you are online with a unit, clicking the "Send to unit" button will send the current
study configuration to the remote unit.

192 TOPS Operating Manual

 Configuring Study Details

CONFIGURING STUDY DETAILS

The following modifications can be made to a study while working in the Details
screen of the Study Configuration module.

Modifying a Heading
To modify a heading type, or to change the limit information, click on the appropriate
"Edit Heading" button. The heading modification form will be shown allowing you to
change the settings as desired. More information about using the heading
modification screen can be found below.

Deleting the Study

If desired, the entire study can be deleted from this screen by clicking the "Delete
Study" button. Doing so will return you to the main study configuration screen.

Editing Study Headings

The heading modification screen (see below) is used to select the type of heading,
and configure heading limits. Once the information has been modified, it can be
accepted by clicking "OK". If no edits are required, clicking the "Cancel" button will
return to the individual study screen.

Figure 51 – Dialog box to edit study headings

Selecting a heading type

The type of heading is selected from the drop down box. Only valid heading types are
displayed. Using the same heading more than once in a study is not permitted. If you
have already used a heading type in a previous heading it will not be available in the
list. If you change a heading to the same type as one of the later headings, the
second instance will be removed.

TOPS Operating Manual 193

Chapter 12 — ADR Commander Add-In: Study Configuration

Example: If the current study configuration is class by speed by length the available
options for heading 3 will not include class or speed. If heading 1 is modified to
speed, the duplicate speed information requested in heading 2 will be removed and
the study will be set to speed by length.

Selecting the number of heading limits

The number of heading limits may be modified by typing in the new number of limits,
or by using the small arrows next to the number of limits text. The maximum number
of limits available will vary based on heading type. Channel and Class have a
maximum of 64 limits. All other headings have a maximum of 99 limits.

Note Use of more than 64 limits is not recommended. This is

because such files are typically used only for special purposes
and cannot be processed using TOPS.

Entering limit information

Having selected the number of limits, the limit information can be modified by editing
the upper limit values in the grid. To make editing easier, subsequent upper limits will
automatically be updated based on the preceding limit information. For example,
entering 10 MPH as the upper limit for the first speed bin will cause each subsequent
limit to be set to 10 MPH higher than its predecessor unless that exceeds the
maximum permitted value for that limit.
Example: To record 10 speed bins with the following ranges -- 0 to 30, 30 to 35, 35 to
40, 40 to 45, 45 to 50 etc. would only require two limits to be entered. First, set the
upper limit for the first speed bin to 30. This will cause the upper limit for the second
to be set to 60, the third to 90, etc. Then edit the upper limit for the second speed bin
to 35. The subsequent upper limits for the third and later bins will automatically be set
to the desired values of 40, 45, 50 etc.

194 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 13 — ADR Commander Add-In:
Data Transfer

This chapter describes the Data Transfer add-in for ADR Commander, and explains how it can
be used to manage data files between TOPS and hardware stations. The following topics are
discussed in detail in this chapter:

• An introduction to the Data Transfer add-in, on page 196.

• Using the interface, on page 197.
• Setting connection properties, on page 202.
• Configuring the operations of data transfer, on page 205.

TOPS Operating Manual 195

Chapter 13 — ADR Commander Add-In: Data Transfer

INTRODUCTION
With version 3.5 of the TOPS software, the Data Transfer Utility was pulled into the
ADR Commander. Data Transfer, as its name suggests, handles the flow of data files
back and forth between the software and ADR units. Since being moved into the ADR
Commander module, Data Transfer can now use the same communications
connection to an ADR device that is established for ADR monitoring, study
configuration, the virtual control panel. This eliminates the need to disconnect and
reconnect with the ADR when switching between these modules.

Using Data Transfer - An Overview

The Data Transfer module is used by both the ADR Commander and by TOPS to
send and receive files from ADR units. It connects to a device, retrieves the current
list of files stored in the device, and then allows the operator to either transfer files
from the device back to the TOPS computer (the most common function of Data
Transfer) or to transfer files up to the device (such as studies and setup files.) It's also
used to manage files by controlling their 'read' and 'unread' flags, and to delete files
that are no longer needed.
The basic process
1. First, the Data Transfer module must be launched, either from within TOPS or
from Windows.
2. The default settings should be configured the first time Data Transfer is used
by going to the Options panel.
3. Set up the communication parameters for the ADR unit you wish to connect to.
These may have been set in TOPS if the module was launched from there.
4. View the current list of files stored on the ADR.
5. If necessary, retrieve any files from the ADR using the Download New,
Download All, or Download Selected controls.
6. If desired, upload any desired files to the ADR using the Upload Files control.
These may be study configuration files that were created in the Study Config
module, or new setup files provided by Quixote Traffic.
7. It's also a good idea to clean up the ADR directory by marking or unmarking
files as read/unread, and deleting any unnecessary files from the directory.
8. When you're finished working with all of the ADR Commander modules with
this unit (they all use the same connection), disconnect from the device and
close the application.
Those are the basics of using the Data Transfer module.

Note The Autopolling capability of TOPS does not use the Data Transfer module to
connect to devices and retrieve files. It establishes its own connections, but it
does mark the 'read'/'unread' status flags for files stored in an ADR unit.

196 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using the Data Transfer Interface

USING THE DATA TRANSFER INTERFACE

When the Data Transfer module opens, it displays the following user interface. It then
attempts to make a connection to a remote unit using its last used settings.
For example: If the last time the DT module was used, it was talking to a Quixote
ADR on Com1 at 9600 baud, it will check and see if a unit is attached to Com1 at that
speed. If no unit can be found, and the link type supports a “scanning” operation, the
program will “search” for a unit. In the case above, if no unit was found at 9600 baud,
the program would also try 19200, 4800, 2400, 1200 and 300 baud.
Once a unit has been contacted, the directory listing is requested. This is then
displayed to the user so they can select which file(s) they want to manipulate.
This is the way that Data Transfer appears in the ADR Commander window when it is
connected with a single data collection unit. If more than one ADR are connected, or
the device has more than one logical media attached, each will appear as a separate
item under the Data Transfer module in the left pane.

Figure 52 – User interface for the Data Transfer module

Refreshing the Display

Click the Refresh button.

Or Press the F5 key.

TOPS Operating Manual 197

Chapter 13 — ADR Commander Add-In: Data Transfer

Data Transfer Menus

File Menu

Download New Files

This will download all files marked as "New" in the remote unit to the current
download directory.

Download All Files

This will download all files from the remote unit to the current download directory.

Download Selected Files

This will download any file(s) currently selected to the current download directory.

Upload a File
When you select this from the menu, a dialog box is displayed so you may select
which file(s) you want to upload. They will be sent to the default media on the remote
device.

Delete Selected Files

Any file(s) already selected will be removed from the remote device.

Mark Selected Files as Read

Any file(s) already selected will be marked as having been read. Therefore, if you try
to download these marked files in the future with other new files, they will not be
downloaded.

Download Directory Selection

When you download files, they will be placed in the directory specified using the form
shown below.

198 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using the Data Transfer Interface

Figure 53 – Selecting a data transfer directory

Edit Menu

Figure 54 – Data Transfer Edit menu

Select All
Selects all files on the current remote media.

View Menu

Figure 55 – Data Transfer View menu

Refresh
Queries the remote unit to rebuild the directory listing and displays any changes.

TOPS Operating Manual 199

Chapter 13 — ADR Commander Add-In: Data Transfer

Connection Menu

Figure 56 – Data Transfer Connection menu

Connection Type
This is where you define what type of connection and type of device each site/station
Data Transfer should expect.

Connect
Attempts to establish the connection between the PC and the remote data collection
equipment.

Disconnect
Closes the connection between the PC and the remote data collection equipment.

Help Menu

Figure 57 – Data Transfer Help menu

About
Shows information about the application (e.g. application version information, serial
number, etc.) The caption shows what type of unit and link the software is configured
to use. It also shows if the connection is open or not.

200 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using the Data Transfer Interface

Data Transfer Toolbar

Data Transfer also uses the toolbars of the ADR Commander modules to provide
additional controls.

Figure 58 – Data Transfer module toolbars

Connection Toolbar — Shows the current status of the connection and allows you to
connect, disconnect, and set connection properties.
Connection Status Toolbar — Somewhat misnamed, this toolbar shows the unit
details (station name, site ID, etc.) for the currently connected ADR unit.
Selected Item Indicator — This toolbar shows which module, stations, study, or data
file is currently selected in the Data Transfer window.
Data Transfer Toolbar — This toolbar controls the functions of the Data Transfer
module, including file upload and download, marking, and deletion.

Figure 59 – Purpose of the Data Transfer toolbar buttons

Data Transfer Status Bar

The status bar shows the current date and time.

TOPS Operating Manual 201

Chapter 13 — ADR Commander Add-In: Data Transfer

SETTING THE CONNECTION PROPERTIES

When the option "Connection Properties" is chosen from the "Connection" menu, a
dialog box specific to the connection type is shown enabling you to configure items
specific to the connection.

Setting Connection and Device Type

Setting the Connection Type
Before you can connect to a piece of data collection equipment you need to choose
the connection type.
1. Open the Connect menu and choose Properties.
2. Select a Type of Connection from the pull-down menu.
3. Select the Type of Protocol from the drop-down list (Local or Modem).

Figure 60 – Connection type selection in Data Transfer

Important If the Peek Idris/ADR 6000 protocol type is selected, select

the Protocol Options tab. You must enter your Username
and password to establish a connection.

Usually, you can accept the standard Connection and Protocol options settings.
However you should configure the following settings for these selections:
If you chose Type of Connection = Local, define the Port and primary Baud Rate to
connect to the ADR.

202 TOPS Operating Manual

 Setting the Connection Properties

If you want the system to scan both ports on your computer, check both boxes
in the Ports to Scan list.
You may check the speeds you want the system to scan by checking the box
next to it in the Speeds to Scan list.
If you chose Type of Connection = Modem, you'll need to select the modem to use (if
more than one are installed on the computer, as well as setting the phone number
and country.

The Set Location and Modem Properties dialog boxes access the standard
Windows modem setup screens that can be accessed in the Control Panel.
If the Type of Protocol = Peek ADR or Peek 241, you'll only need to set a Comms ID
on the Protocol Options tab if you have more than one ADR connected to the direct
port at once.
The default ID is 1, use this if you only have a single ADR connected to the port.
This is particularly useful if you are using a serial splitter module, in which case,
any ADR connected to any port that comes from this single port by being
assigned a unique ID between 1 and 32767.
If the Type of Protocol = Peek Idris/ADR 6000, you must provide the proper
Username and Password for the ADR-6000 unit on the Protocol Options tab, or else
Data Transfer will not function with the device.

Direct (RS232) Connection Properties

Figure 61 – Direct connection properties

This dialog box allows you to decide which communications port and baud rate you
want to use. Alternatively, if there is a unit attached to the PC, the "Find unit" button
can be used at which point the application will search the available communication
ports to locate the data collection device.

Modem Connection Properties

This dialog box allows you to configure the modem connection for communicating
with a remote unit. You may also use the "Set Location" button to change the location
from which you are dialing. Microsoft’s dialer will then be able to determine exactly
what number needs to be dialed. The "Modem properties" button causes the dialog

TOPS Operating Manual 203

Chapter 13 — ADR Commander Add-In: Data Transfer

box to be shown in which you can configure modem specific parameters (Speaker
volume, Initialization string etc.)

Figure 62 – Modem connection properties

It is recommended that if you type in a phone number, you enclose the area code in
brackets. For example: (941) is the area code in the number shown above. If
necessary, you can also specify a country code, putting a "+" sign in front of it.

Note You only need to specify the country if it is different from where the
call is being made.

204 TOPS Operating Manual

 Configuring Data Transfer

CONFIGURING DATA TRANSFER

To open the Data Transfer Options screen:
1. Select Tools from the menu.
2. Select Communications from the drop-down menu.
3. Select Data Transfer Options from the menu. The Data Transfer Options
window is displayed.
4. Make the changes on the Options window to your preference.
5. Click the OK command button.

Figure 63 – Data Transfer Options window

File Download Options

You may change the way your system processes data during the download process.
If a file already exists…
Prompt User for Operation: If you want a dialog box to appear asking for
confirmation to overwrite the existing file, select this button.

TOPS Operating Manual 205

Chapter 13 — ADR Commander Add-In: Data Transfer

Overwrite existing file: If you do not want the system to ask for confirmation to
overwrite an existing file, select this button.
Download the file but use a different name: If you want the system to download
the file, but create a different name for the data, select this button.
If you want the system to automatically mark the downloaded files as “read” after the
download is complete, check this box. If you do not check this box, you will have to
mark the files as read manually in the Data Transfer program.
You may update the directory of where you want downloaded data stored by clicking
the Browse command button.

Connection/File Listing Options

On Connection area: When a connection is established to a remote unit, you may
elect to: (a) have your computer automatically get the directory of files in the unit, or
(b) do nothing at all until you manually request information.
File Listing area: When displaying a directory of information, you may elect to: (a)
show all the files in the directory, whether they’ve been read or not, or (b) show only
new files that have not been read.

Current/Selected files
Current File area: While downloading files, you may elect to have the system “close
and collect” the files. You may check one or both of the following boxes to your
preference:
Include currently recording file(s): Check this box to include the currently
recording files in the download. By checking this box, you will not require the file to
be closed.
Close current file before collecting: Check this box to have the system
automatically close the current file before downloading new information. Once the
current file is closed, a new file will automatically be started. To view this new file,
refresh the directory listing. After the system has downloaded the information, the file
will be marked as “read”.
Selected File(s) area: You may eliminate the confirmation popup window from
appearing after you delete a file by unchecking this box.

206 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 14 — TOPS Add-In:
Autopolling Module

Chapter 14-TOPS Add-In: Autopolling introduces the automatic data polling add-in module for
TOPS, and how to use it. The following topics are discussed in detail in this chapter:

• An introduction to Autopolling, on page 208.

• Configuring and managing polling groups, on page 209.
• Configuring the operation of the module, on page 215.

TOPS Operating Manual 207

Chapter 14 — TOPS Add-In: Autopolling Module

OVERVIEW
The TOPS autopolling add-in is used to automatically poll any counters and
classifiers, following a user defined polling schedule. Before you can use the add-in, it
must be made active within TOPS. This happens by default when TOPS is installed
with the Professional or Enterprise Editions of the software.
Once the add-in is enabled, the Autopoll toolbar is available within TOPS. This
consists of two buttons, as shown below.

Figure 64 – AutoPolling buttons

Poll Now command button — Click this button to immediately start the polling
process (before the pre-assigned autopolling time and date.)
Add New command button — Click this button to add a new Autopoll group.

Enabling and Disabling Autopolling

When the “Autopoll enable/disable” button is depressed, the autopoll operation is
enabled. This is also reflected in the status bar at the bottom of the main TOPS
interface.
This button toggles between two appearances:

Enabled: Disabled:
To change from enabled to disabled (or vice versa), simply click on the “Autopoll
enable/disable” button, or you can:
1. Select Tools from the menu.
2. Select Communications from the drop-down menu.
3. Select Enable or Disable from the menu.
When the autopoll operation is enabled, TOPS will periodically check all available
autopoll groups. If a group has reached or passed the time when it should be polled,
TOPS will initiate communication to all stations associated with that group.

Important Only those Autopoll groups that have the “Group Enabled” check box
marked in the “Edit Autopoll Group” dialog box will be polled.

Note When enabling Autopolling, it is also a good idea to enable the ‘Move Files on
Import’ option in TOPS, to prevent operating system problems caused by a large
number of data files in the download directory.

208 TOPS Operating Manual

 Configuring Polling Groups

CONFIGURING POLLING GROUPS

Polling groups are created in the Edit Autopoll Group dialog box.

Figure 65 – Edit Autopoll Group dialog box

Polling Group Selection — Select the autopoll group you want to work with from this
drop-down list.
Group Enabled Checkbox — Check this box if you want autopolling to occur for the
selected group.

Date and Time Tab

The following controls appear on the Date and Time tab of the Edit Polling Group
window.
Autopoll starts at — Select the time to have the autopolling begin for the selected
group.
This will be run on the following days — Check the box next to each day you want
the autopolling to occur for the selected group.
Delete Group button — After you’ve selected the name of the Autopoll group from
the drop-down list, click this button to permanently remove it.
Add New button — Click this button to add a new Autopoll group.
Poll Now button — To immediately start the polling process (before the assigned
time and day), click this button.

TOPS Operating Manual 209

Chapter 14 — TOPS Add-In: Autopolling Module

Operations Tab
The following controls appear on the Operations tab of the Edit Polling Group window.

Figure 66 – Operations tab of the Edit Autopoll Group dialog box

Collect Files/Which Files — Check the box labeled “Collect Files” to have the
system download data during polling. Select whether you want:
All files — All files on the ADR. If this button is selected, it will take more time to
download the data.
Only new files — Only those files that have not been marked as read.
Type of Files — Select whether you want to download Bin Files and/or PVR Files by
checking the appropriate boxes.
Mark Collected Files — Check this box to have the collected files marked as “read”
once they’ve been downloaded.
Include currently recording file — Check this box to include the polled data into the
currently recording file.
Collect and close currently recording file — Check this box to collect the data from
the currently recording file(s), then close the file.
Check Unit Status control — Specifies whether unit status information should be
retrieved along with the regular data during autopolling.

210 TOPS Operating Manual

 Configuring Polling Groups

Status Options button — The specific type of status information that should be
retrieved can be selected using the Status Options button. The Check Unit Status
Options dialog box allows the operator to select which unit status information should
be retrieved during autopolling. The retrieval of any of the following three items may
be enabled or disabled:

device firmware version

current voltage of the internal battery of the device
the status of the onboard battery charger

Configure Unit — The “Configure Unit” check box is disabled. This feature will be
available in a future version of TOPS Autopoll.

Creating an Autopoll Group

To automatically poll a specific station, it must be assigned to an autopoll group.
Selecting the station (or stations) you wish to create a group for. You may have a
group that includes as few as one station; there is no limit to the number of stations
that may be added to the group.

You may click the Edit Autopoll Group button.

Or
1. Select Tools from the menu.
2. Select Communications from the drop-down menu.
3. Select Edit Autopoll Group from the menu.
4. The Date/Time Tab of the Autopoll Group window is displayed. Press the Add
New command button. A new group is added to the system, and a generic
name is input into the field at the top of the screen. You may type in a polling
group name.
5. The “Group enabled” checkbox must be checked for autopoll to function.
6. Specify the time polling should begin for the group from the drop-down list.
7. Check the boxes for the days you want the new group to poll. This feature is
useful if you have many stations to poll in a single night. You may assign half
your stations to poll on Monday, Wednesday and Friday, and the other half to
poll Sunday, Tuesday and Thursday.
8. Click the Operations Tab. This tab allows you to select what type of operation
will be performed when the site is polled.
9. Select which files you want collected:

TOPS Operating Manual 211

Chapter 14 — TOPS Add-In: Autopolling Module

All files -- All files on the ADR. If this button is selected, it will take more
time to download the data.
Only new files -- Only those files that have not been marked as read.
10. Select which type(s) of files you want downloaded by checking the appropriate
boxes: Bin Files and/or PVR Files.
11. You may elect to have the collected files marked as “read” once they’ve been
downloaded. By doing so, you will avoid re-downloading files previously
collected. Check the box labeled “Mark collected files”.
12. You may include the polled data into the currently recording file. Check the
box labeled “Include currently recording file(s)”.
13. You may elect to collect the data from the currently recording file(s), then close
the file. Check the box labeled “Collect and close currently recording
file(s)”. Once the current file is downloaded, a new file is started.

Note There are two check boxes that are disabled “Check Unit Status”
and “Configure Unit”. These features will be available in a future
version of TOPS Autopoll.

14. If you want to poll the stations in this group right away, click the Poll Now
command button. If you want the system to automatically poll as specified,
click the OK command button.
15. Ensure that the Autopoll function is enabled. In the bottom right corner of the
TOPS screen, the system will indicate whether Autopoll is Enabled or not.

If it is disabled, click the Autopoll button.

Notice when the Station View is displayed, the Autopoll Group column has the
name of your new group displayed in those stations included in your group.

Important You must leave your computer and TOPS program running
in order for the Autopoll function to occur.

212 TOPS Operating Manual

 Configuring Polling Groups

Setting the Time and Day to Poll

Selecting one of the stations in the Autopoll group you want to update the autopoll
time and/or days of from the Station View.

1. You may click the Edit Autopoll Group button.

Or
1. Select Tools from the menu.
2. Select Communications from the drop-down menu.
3. Select Edit Autopoll Group from the menu.
4. The Date/Time Tab of the Autopoll Group window is displayed. Click the
down arrow in the field labeled “Autopoll Starts at”. Select the time polling
should begin for the group from the drop-down list.
5. Check the boxes for the days you want the new group to poll. This feature is
useful if you have many stations to poll in a single night. You may assign half
your stations to poll on Monday, Wednesday and Friday, and the other half to
poll Sunday, Tuesday and Thursday.
6. Click the OK command button.

Important You must leave your computer and TOPS program

running in order for the Autopoll function to occur.

Removing an Autopoll Group

1. You may click the Edit Autopoll Group button.

Or
1. Select Tools from the menu.
2. Select Communications from the drop-down menu.
3. Select Edit Autopoll Group from the menu.
4. The Date/Time Tab of the Autopoll Group window is displayed. Select the
name of the Autopoll group you want to delete from the drop-down list at the
top of the screen.
5. Click the Delete Group command button. The group has now been removed
from your system.
6. Click the OK command button.

TOPS Operating Manual 213

Chapter 14 — TOPS Add-In: Autopolling Module

Changing the Name of an Autopoll Group

1. Selecting one of the stations in the Autopoll group you want to update the
autopoll name of from the Station View.

2. You may click the Edit Autopoll Group button.

Or
1. Select Tools from the menu.
2. Select Communications from the drop-down menu.
3. Select Edit Autopoll Group from the menu.
4. The Date/Time Tab of the Autopoll Group window is displayed. Highlight the
name of the Autopoll Group that you want to change.
5. Type in the New name for the group.
6. Click the OK command button. Notice the name for this group is now changed
for all the Stations it applies to, as displayed in the Station View.

Important You must leave your computer and TOPS program running
in order for the Autopoll function to occur.

214 TOPS Operating Manual

 Configuring Autopolling

CONFIGURING AUTOPOLLING
Most of the configurable settings in Autopoll are managed in the Autopoll Options
window. The Options window can be opened by going to
Tools > Communications > Properties > Autopoll Options.

Figure 67 – Autopoll Options dialog box

Browse button —Select the folder you want the system to store your downloaded
files in from the tree view.
New Folder command button — Click this button to create a new folder to download
the data to.
Download Files to — This field displays the folder the data will be downloaded to.
To change this folder, click the Browse command button.
Setting the Modem for Autopoll — The name of the modem that will complete the
Autopoll process. If you only have one modem installed on your computer, it will be
selected by default. If you have more than one modem installed, you may change the
modem by selecting it from the list box.

Selecting a Modem for Autopoll

The Autopoll module needs to know which modem you want to use for polling
operations in TOPS.
1. Select Tools from the menu.
2. Select Communications from the drop-down menu.
3. Select Properties from the menu.
4. Select Autopoll Options from the menu. The Autopoll Options dialog box is
displayed.
5. From the list box, select the modem you want your system to use for
autopolling.
6. Click the OK command button.

TOPS Operating Manual 215

Chapter 14 — TOPS Add-In: Autopolling Module

Important On some machines, it may be necessary to exit from TOPS and restart
the computer before the change will take effect.

Setting the Autopoll Download Directory

The Autopoll module needs to know which modem you want to use for polling
operations in TOPS.
1. Select Tools from the menu.
2. Select Communications from the drop-down menu.
3. Select Properties from the menu.
4. Select Autopoll Options from the menu. The Autopoll Options dialog box is
displayed.
5. The directory where the files will be downloaded to is displayed in the field at
the top of the dialog box. To change this directory, click the Browse command
button. The Set Download Directory dialog box is displayed.
6. On the tree view, select the directory you want the downloaded files stored in
during the Autopoll process.
7. Click the OK command button to close the Set Download Directory dialog box.
8. Click the OK command button to close the Autopoll Options dialog box.

Note When enabling Autopolling, it is also a good idea to enable the

‘Move Files on Import’ option in TOPS, to prevent operating
system problems caused by a large number of data files in the
download directory.

216 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 15 — TOPS Add-in: File Backup

This chapter describes the File Backup add-in module for TOPS. The following topics are
discussed in detail in this chapter:

• An introduction to File Backup in TOPS, on page 218.

• How to activate and deactivate file backup, on page 219.
• Configuring the operation of File Backup, on page 221.

TOPS Operating Manual 217

Chapter 15 — TOPS Add-in: File Backup

OVERVIEW
The File Backup utility is intended to assist in the management of the raw data files
imported into the database. This module allows you to specify a backup directory
where files will be moved to after being imported into the database. Furthermore, you
can specify how the files will be organized in the backup directory structure.
First you must enable the backup add-in and specified the backup directory structure.
After each file is imported into TOPS, the file is copied to the appropriate directory
automatically. If the desired sub-directory does not exist, it is created before the file is
copied.

How the Backup Utility Works

After the File Backup add-in is loaded, and you have specified a backup directory
structure, the utility is active within TOPS. But what exactly is it doing?
It's quite simple. After each ADR data file is imported into TOPS, the file is
automatically copied to an appropriately-named directory in your base directory. If
the desired sub-directory doesn't exist yet, it is created before the file is copied.

Example
If the backup file structure has been set to Site ID, then Month-Year, when a file
dated 3/15/00 from a new site is imported, a new folder is created in the Base
directory whose name is the site ID from that file. Within that directory, another folder
is created named "March 2000", based on the month and year of the data file. All
subsequent files imported from that site will be moved into the same directory until a
different month and/or year is encountered. At that time, a new directory is created.

How TOPS moves the files

First you must enable the backup add-in and specified the backup directory structure.
After each file is imported into TOPS, the file is copied to the appropriate directory
automatically. If the desired sub-directory does not exist, it is created before the file is
copied.

Example:
The backup structure is by Site ID then Month-Year. When a file from a new site is
imported, a new folder is created in the base directory whose name is the site ID from
that file. Within that directory, another folder is created named “March 2000”, based
on the month and year of that file. All subsequent files imported from that site will be
moved into the same directory until a different month and/or year is encountered. At
that time, a new directory is created.

218 TOPS Operating Manual

 Activating/Deactivating File Backup

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING FILE BACKUP

In order to use File Backup within TOPS, it needs to be loaded (using the Add-In
Manager) and then enabled.

Loading the File Backup Add-in

The File Backup utility is an add-in module for the TOPS system. If it was installed
with TOPS, it is normally configured to load automatically whenever TOPS starts.
However, if this backup module was not configured to load, it can be activated by
performing these steps within TOPS.
1. With TOPS up and running, go to the Add-ins menu.
2. Select the Add-in Manager.
3. In the Add-in Manager window, make sure that both the Load and Load on
Startup check boxes are checked in the File Backup row.
4. Press the Apply button to load the File Backup module immediately.
5. Press OK to close the Add-in Manager.
The File Backup module is now available in TOPS, however by default it is not initially
enabled to perform backups.

Enabling File Backup

1. Select File from the menu.
2. Select Import from the drop-down menu.
3. Select File Backup Options from the menu. The Backup Directory Designer
window is displayed.
4. To enable the backup utility, select the radio button labeled Move files to a
backup directory when loaded.
5. Notice the rest of the window is now enabled for you to select file backup
options. If you want PRV files renamed to the TDP standard, check the box
labeled Rename PVR Files to TDP Standard.
6. Select the button indicating what the system should do if a file with the same
name already exists in the backup directory:
7. Overwrite old file – This option will copy the current file over the existing one.
8. Rename file automatically – This option will rename the current file “Copy 1
of <filename>”. This is the default option.
9. Prompt for new file name – This option will display a dialog prompting for a
new file name if the file already exists in the backup directory.

TOPS Operating Manual 219

Chapter 15 — TOPS Add-in: File Backup

10. The Backup directory where your files will be stored is displayed. You can
change this directory by clicking the Browse command button. The Base
Directory dialog box is displayed. Select the folder where you want the backup
files stored, then click the OK command button. Notice the tree view below
gives you a visual of the directory where you will store the data.

Note Notice Site ID\Month_Year\ is displayed in red text in the directory

structure. These sub-directories are automatically inserted using the list
boxes below.

11. At the bottom of the window are two list boxes: Available Directories and
Chosen Directories. Set up and organize the Directory structure to your
preference.
12. Click the OK command button.

Disabling File backup

1. Select File from the menu.
2. Select Import from the drop-down menu.
3. Select File Backup Options from the menu. The Backup Directory Designer
window is displayed.
4. To enable the backup utility, select the radio button labeled Do not move files
to a backup directory when loaded. Notice all the functions in this window
are disabled.
5. Click the OK command button.

220 TOPS Operating Manual

 Configuring File Backup Operation

CONFIGURING FILE BACKUP OPERATION

Configuring the operation of the File Backup Add-in is done using the Backup
Directory Designer.

Using the Backup Directory Designer

The functions of the File Backup Utility are configured in the Backup Directory
Designer window, shown here. This window is accessed by going to the F i l e menu
and selecting the I m p o r t > F i l e B a c k u p O p t i o n s control.

Figure 68 – Backup Directory Designer window

It can be used to activate/deactivate key features of the File Backup utility
Set a base directory for the backup files
Define what file details are used to create the storage subdirectories in the base
directory

Using the Enable Buttons

Select one of these buttons to either enable or disable the backup utility:
Do not move files to a backup directory when loaded -- To enable the backup
utility
Move files to a backup directory when loaded -- To enable the backup utility
Rename PVR Files to TDP Standard -- To enable the backup of Per Vehicle
Record files to be renamed using the 8.3 character TDP file naming standard.

TOPS Operating Manual 221

Chapter 15 — TOPS Add-in: File Backup

The TDP standard encodes the month and date of the data, along with the site
ID in the name. This option should only be needed if you are using an older
export or viewing utility that requires TDP standard file names.

Setting a Base backup directory

The primary configuration option for the FileBackup Utility is the "base" directory
where all of the other backup directories and files will be stored.
To specify a base directory, select F i l e > I m p o r t > F i l e B a c k u p O p t i o n s to
open the Backup Directory Designer window. Select the Browse button and navigate
to the desired directory. The selected directory path will be displayed to the left of the
browse button.

Figure 69 – Setting a base directory for File Backup

Designing a Directory Structure

In addition to designating a single backup directory, you may create a sub-directory
structure to organize the files in a number of ways. The bottom of the Backup
Directory Designer window shows two lists. The one on the left represents the
optional fields for your directory structure. The list on the right shows the directories
you’ve selected. Notice as you change the directory information, the data is inserted
into the “Backup directory structure” field above.

Using the Dual List

To move a field from one side to the other, select the field and click the single arrow
button pointing to the list where the field will be moved.
To move multiple items, select them holding the <CTRL > key down, then click the
appropriate single arrow button.

222 TOPS Operating Manual

 Configuring File Backup Operation

To move all of the fields from one side to the other, click one of the double arrow
buttons.
If you wish to move one of the fields in the right list up or down, select the field and,
holding the mouse button down, drag the field up or down to the desired position.
Then release the mouse button to drop the field in the new position.

Example: To organize the files first by site ID then by month/year, do the

following
In the left list select the fields “Site ID” and “Month_Year”.
Click the single right arrow button to move the two fields to the right list. Note that the
above view will now display a sample of the directory structure with these fields in red
text.
Make sure the fields are in the correct order. If “Month_Year” is above “Site ID”, drag
it below the “Site ID” field. The screen will appear with the structure changes made.

Available Fields
The fields available to use in the backup directory structure are as follows:
Site ID
Station Number
Recorder Serial Number
Month_Year
*Station Name

Note This field does not exist in the raw data files, so it can only be used once all of
the stations exist in the database the station names are set.

Setting Overwrite Options

It is necessary to tell TOPS what to do if the file you are moving already exists in the
backup directory. There are three options:
Overwrite - This will copy the current file over the existing one.
Rename - This will rename the current file “Copy 1 of filename”. This is the default
option.
Prompt for filename - This will display a dialog prompting for a new file name if the
file already exists in the backup directory.

TOPS Operating Manual 223

Chapter 15 — TOPS Add-in: File Backup

224 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 16 — TOPS Add-in: Auto-Import

This chapter describes the Auto-Import add-in module for TOPS. The following topics are
discussed in detail in this chapter:

• An overview of the Auto-Import add-in module, on page 226.

• Loading Auto-Import upon startup, on page 227.
• Configuring the function of Auto-Import, on page 228.
• File access rights to support Auto-Import, on page 229.
• The relationship between Auto-Import and FileBackup, on page 231.
• Auto-Import in a multiple database environment, on page 231.

TOPS Operating Manual 225

Chapter 16 — TOPS Add-in: Auto-Import

OVERVIEW OF AUTO-IMPORT
The Auto-Import Add-in module was added to TOPS in version 3.7. The Auto-Import
module is installed by default during the installation, but can be deactivated during the
install on the Select Add-in Components screen of the installation. If the Auto-Import
Add-in is installed with TOPS, the program has the capability to monitor a user-
selected directory and automatically import into TOPS any data files that are placed
there.

Figure 70 – Auto-Import module during installation

Note If Auto-Import will be used, be sure to also install the “FileBackup

(Auto-move files on import)” component as well. FileBackup is
used with Auto-Import to keep the watch folder clear of older data
and log files.

The Auto-Import Add-in component allows TOPS to be used more easily with external
data generation or transport tools, such as the Z-Link software for Palm or Pocket PC
devices, third-party file and data management utilities, operating system batch files
and scripts, or the IQData Autopolling software.

226 TOPS Operating Manual

 Overview of Auto-import

Figure 71 –Auto-Import in the Add-In Manager

The Auto-Import component appears in the Add-In manager, which can be opened
from the Add-ins menu. (Add-Ins > Add-In Manager…) Auto-Import only functions
when TOPS is running. If one or more files of the normally-supported TOPS data file
types is placed in the local or network folder that has been specified in the Add-in
component, TOPS will automatically import the data into its database. This import
happens the next time TOPS is launched. If the data is placed in the folder while
TOPS is running, it will be imported immediately. (The frequency with which TOPS
checks for new data is configurable in the Auto-Import Options window, as shown in
Figure 72.)

Important When configuring Auto-Import for use, be sure that the FileBackup (aka
‘Auto-move’) component is also set to load on startup. FileBackup takes
care of cleaning up the watch folder after the data is imported into TOPS.
Running Auto-Import without FileBackup active will cause Auto-Import to
perform its own file moves out of the watch folder. However, the data
mapped to these files will not be tracked by TOPS if they are moved by
Auto-Import. When FileBackup moves a file, the new location of the data is
reported back to TOPS. For .bin files, this is not terribly important, as the
data files are merely backup copies of the information already stored inside
the TOPS database. However, .pvr data is not copied into TOPS, so the
moved files are the actual source of the pvr data used by TOPS. The result:
if the watch folder is cleaned up by Auto-Import rather than FileBackup,
TOPS will not be able to generate PVR reports based on this data.

TOPS Operating Manual 227

Chapter 16 — TOPS Add-in: Auto-Import

CONFIGURING AUTO-IMPORT
Highlighting Auto-Import in the Add-In Manager and clicking on the Options button
opens the configuration window shown in Figure 72.

Figure 72 – Auto-Import Options screen

This option window provides all of the controls for the Auto-Import component.
Watch Directory — Use the Browse button to select the directory location that TOPS
will monitor to see if new data files are present. If files are present, Auto-import will
attempt to pull the data into the TOPS database. Auto-Import pays attention to the
Watch directory and anything beneath it. So folders within the Watch directory are
also monitored by Auto-Import.
Check for new files every — The next item determines how often TOPS checks the
Watch directory for new files. The default is every 10 seconds, but any value between
0 and 600 seconds (10 minutes) is possible.
Ignore files created or modified in the last — This setting can be used to give a
large file some time to be stored in the watch folder before TOPS attempts to import
it. (Large .PVR data files may take several seconds to transfer into the Watch folder.)
After attempting to import a file… — Any files that are not of a type that TOPS
recognizes as a data file can then be moved automatically to another location. It is a
good idea to keep the watch directory free from extraneous files. Note that the

228 TOPS Operating Manual

 File Access Rights to Support Auto-Import

FileBackup component only manages data files, so this extra feature of Auto-import
takes care of non-data files that may end up in the Watch folder, such as log files,
error files, and non-standard data files.
Prompt before importing — These three settings determine whether Auto-import
reports anything to the operator when new files are discovered in the Watch folder.
Never — This setting tells Auto-import to always import data files from the Watch
folder without asking for verification from the user.
Once per session — This setting tells Auto-Import to ask for import verification the
first time during a TOPS session that it detects a new file in the Watch folder.
Whe files are available to import — This option window tells Auto-Import to ask
the operator whether or not to import data every time it detects new files in (or
under) the Watch folder. It only asks once each time it detects any new files in the
folder.

Support for the new IQData AutoPoller

IQData Autopoller is a module that functions as a service to the Windows operating
system. This module schedules and manages ADR data polling events and passes
the data back to TOPS. Since it follows the Windows Service model, it can be
configured to automatically start up upon PC power up, and will automatically restart
in the event that the computer (or a Windows application) locks up. By using the Auto-
Import feature that was added in TOPS v3.7, the resulting data files generated by
IQData Autopoller can be pulled straight into TOPS without requiring any user
actions.

Figure 73 – Autopolling module of IQData

FILE ACCESS RIGHTS TO SUPPORT AUTO-IMPORT

The Auto-Import module configuration requires that directory locations be selected for
a Watch directory and as a backup directory. These directory locations, as with the
rest of TOPS, may be a folder on the local computer or somewhere on the local
network. However, there are some access and security rights settings that must be
considered in order for Auto-Import to function correctly

TOPS Operating Manual 229

Chapter 16 — TOPS Add-in: Auto-Import

Folders on the Local Machine

In general, local directories are the easiest to configure. If Auto-Import is running on a
computer and the Watch and backup directories are on the same machine under the
same user account, just pick the folders in the Auto-Import Options window. Auto-
Import will work correctly in this scenario.
However, if multiple user accounts exist on the single computer and you wish to
configure Auto-Import to watch a directory that is not owned by the account that will
be running the program, the user that runs Auto-Import must be given read, change
and delete rights to the desired watch and backup folders on the other account.

Folders Across a Network

Auto-Import can be configured to retrieve files from a Watch folder, or send files to a
backup folder, across a local area network. The basic requirement for this to work is
that the user account on the local computer where Auto-Import is being run must be
able to ‘see’ the remote network location. And this visibility across the network must
be maintained whenever the user logs into the account.
Some issues about using network folders for Watch and backup locations are specific
to the type of Windows being used. The following topics describe the requirements
based on the operating system where the watch or backup folder is located.

Windows NT or Windows 2000

If the file location specified by Auto-Import for the Watch folder or the backup storage
folder is on a computer that is running Windows NT or Windows 2000, the selected
directory locations should be set to be shared.
1. On the computer that will host the Watch or backup folder, right-click on the
folder and choose Sharing.
2. On the Sharing tab, click on Share this folder. The default Permissions should
be acceptable. (Auto-Import must Read and have Full Control to the Watch
directory. It must have Read, Change, and Full Control permissions for the
backup folder.) These rights must also be granted for folders located under the
Wach and backup folders.
3. Click OK on the Sharing window to save the settings.

Windows XP
Windows XP, particularly if Service Pack 2 is installed, has a more strict default
security setup. Under Windows XP, the selected Watch and backup folders, and the
drive or drives upon which they reside, must have these items checked:
Share this folder on the network
All network users to change my files

230 TOPS Operating Manual

 Importance of FileBackup to Auto-Import

Note Setting these values for the drive does not open up the whole
computer. It only allows network users to make changes to
folders that also have these share options set.

Note The Watch directory and its subfolders are monitored by Auto-
Import recursively, so all subfolders of the Watch directory
also need the same access rights.

IMPORTANCE OF FILEBACKUP TO AUTO-IMPORT

If Auto-Import is going to be used on the TOPS system, the FileBackup Add-In
component should also be configured for use. In particular, FileBackup should also be
configured to pay attention to the same Watch directory that Auto-Import uses.
It is important to use FileBackup because it is the component that lets TOPS know
when and where files are stored after they are moved. Although Auto-Import will take
care of cleaning up the Watch folder on its own, it does not inform TOPS about where
the data has been moved. Auto-Import will move non-data files, or files that generate
errors upon an import attempt, to the selected backup location and remove them from
the Watch folder. It will also move data files and remove them from the Watch folder,
but only if FileBackup is not running. Since data from .bin files is stored inside the
TOPS databases, it is not that important for TOPS to know where these data files
have been moved, but the data from .pvr files is not actually stored inside the TOPS
database. TOPS merely keeps track of the source file so that the data can be
retrieved when needed. FileBackup is the module that keeps TOPS informed when it
moves these files.
The bottom line is that if you are using Auto-Import to keep the Watch folder clean of
extraneous files, running a PVR report will result in errors since TOPS will not be able
to find the original .pvr data. However, reports based on .bin data will run correctly in
this situation.

AUTO-IMPORT AND MULTIPLE DATABASES

Auto-Import pulls data from the Watch directory straight into whichever TOPS
database is currently active under the logged in user. If a new data file is placed into
the Watch folder while the operator is looking at an archive database, and Auto-
Import is active, and the user agrees to the import, the data will be pulled into the
archive database rather than the main ‘live’ database.

Note When performing database maintenance tasks, it is a good idea to temporarily

deactivate Auto-Import. This will prevent data from being accidentally imported
into the wrong database.

TOPS Operating Manual 231

Chapter 16 — TOPS Add-in: Auto-Import

232 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 17 — TOPS Add-in:
TDP Station Import

This chapter describes how to use the TDP station import add-in module for TOPS to convert
data from the older TDP data management software into TOPS data. The following topics are
discussed in detail in this chapter:

• An introduction to TOPS and TDP data, on page 234.

• Enabling and disabling TDP import, on page 236.
• Using the TDP Import wizard, on page 237.
• Processing data imported from TDP files, on page 241.

TOPS Operating Manual 233

Chapter 17 — TOPS Add-in: TDP Station Import

OVERVIEW
The TDP Station Import add-in for TOPS allows you to import TDP Station files and
related information into the TOPS database. It should be noted that there are some
fundamental differences between TDP and TOPS in handling Stations.

Traffic Data Processor

A Traffic Data Processor (TDP) is a DOS based software product used to process
data. The TDP Import program allows Users to import the list of stations from TDP
(including connection parameters, telephone numbers, etc.) into a TOPS database
so they do not have to re-enter all station connection information.
1. Create a new TOPS database. It is recommended that you create a new
database by selecting File on the menu, select New from the drop-down
menu, enter the name of your new database. The TDP Import will not
overwrite existing Stations in the TOPS database. This will ensure that most or
all of the TDP Stations get imported.
2. Run the TDP Import Wizard. Select the files to import and process them.
3. Confirm the Stations’ information. Since TOPS and TDP do not store
Stations identically, there may be some discrepancies in the imported Station
list.

TOPS versus TDP Stations

There are some fundamental differences between TOPS and TDP, which need to be
addressed when moving from TDP to TOPS.
Definition of a Station:
In TOPS, a Station shows up as a single row in the Station grid of the data explorer.
Every unique Site ID / Station Number will have its own row. This Station represents
one recorder at the particular site. If a site has 4 recorders, they should have the
same Site ID and a different Station Number. In this example, the site would be
represented as 4 rows in the data explorer, one for each Station.
In TDP, a single Station may have more than one recorder associated with it
(multiplexed site) by setting the “Num Units” field to a value greater than 1. In this
case, the Station really represents a number of sub-Stations under it.
This issue will become evident when a single TDP Station with 2 recorders is
imported into TOPS and appears as two Stations in TOPS.
Station Number / Site ID / telephone number:
In TOPS, the Site ID and Station Number are read from the file being imported and
the data is stored under the matching Station. If there is no matching Station, a new
one is created. This is done independently of the telephone number for that Station in
the Station grid. TOPS expects the Station Number / Site ID of the unit contacted to
match those in the row from which it was contacted.

234 TOPS Operating Manual

 Overview

Important If the Station Number and Site ID of the unit do not match, the data will
be imported into a different Station.

The Site ID and Station Number in TDP overrides the Site ID and Station Number in
the recorder contacted from TDP. In other words, TDP associates the Site ID / Station
Number entered by the user with the telephone number entered for that Station. Any
data downloaded from a particular Station in TDP will always be stored as the Station
Number / Site ID in the TDP Station regardless of what the unit contacted is
programmed as.
This issue will become evident when, after completing the TDP Import, you connect to
a Station from within TOPS, download a file and import it. If the downloaded file(s)
import into TOPS under a new or different Station in the Station grid, then the unit
does not match the database.

Launching the TDP import Wizard

The first step to importing the TDP Station data is to launch the TDP Import Wizard.

Click the TDP Import button on the database toolbar.

Or
Select Tools from the menu. Select Database from the drop-down menu. Select
Import TDP Stations from the submenu.
If you cannot find the button or menu item, and you are sure that TDP Import has
been installed, check the Add-In Manager to verify that it is currently loaded.

TOPS Operating Manual 235

Chapter 17 — TOPS Add-in: TDP Station Import

ENABLING AND DISABLING THE TDP IMPORT

To enable the TDP Import add-in:
1. Select Add-Ins from the menu
2. Select Add-In Manager from the drop-down menu.
3. In the Add-In Manager window, select the TDP Station Conversion row. If it
does not appear in this list, then it has not been properly installed on your
computer.
4. Check the box to load it immediately and/or check the box to have TOPS
always load it on startup.
5. Click the OK command button to close the window.

The TDP Import button will now appear in the database toolbar.

To disable the TDP Import add-in

Once you have completed the TDP Import and you no longer need to run it, you can
disable the add-in:
1. Select Add-Ins from the menu
2. Select Add-In Manager from the drop-down menu.
3. In the Add-In Manager window, select the TDP Station Conversion row.
4. Un-check the box labeled load and/or un-check the box labeled load on
startup.
5. Click the OK command button to close the window.
The TDP Import module will no longer be loaded every time you run TOPS.

236 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using the TDP Import Wizard

USING THE TDP IMPORT WIZARD

The first screen of the Import Wizard outlines the three steps to begin the conversion.
Set Directories – Locate the installation of TDP (if applicable), and select where the
import log will be saved.
Select files to Import – Select which TDP files (*.prm) to import into TOPS.
Review Settings – Review your settings before starting the import process.

Wizard Directory Settings Screen

The Second screen of the TDP Import Wizard allows you to change the directory
settings.
TDP Installation Directory: The wizard will scan this directory in the next screen for
all relevant TDP files that can be imported. If you have TDP installed on this
computer, click the top Browse command button and locate the folder where TDP is
installed. If it is not installed on your computer, you may ignore this setting.
Log File Directory: This is where the import log file will be saved after the import
process is complete. This defaults to the TOPS install directory; you may specify a
different location by clicking the Browse command button next to this field.

Figure 74 – Directory Settings screen

Wizard File Selections Screen

The third screen in the TDP Import Wizard allows you to select which file(s) you wish
to import into TOPS. If you selected a TDP install directory on the previous screen,
there should be four files in the list already. By default, only the remote Station
information is selected.

TOPS Operating Manual 237

Chapter 17 — TOPS Add-in: TDP Station Import

Figure 75 – File Selections screen

Select Files to Import — This list contains all relevant files in the TDP directory (if
installed) and any files you have added. Select which files you wish to import here.
Add Files to List — If the list of files does not contain one or more files that you are
looking to import, click the Add File(s) command button to locate them. After you have
selected the files to be added, ensure they are all highlighted (as displayed) so they
are included in the import. If you want to import a file located in a different folder, click
the Add File(s) command button. There are four types of TDP parameter files that
can be imported into TOPS:
Table 9 – TDP Parameter File types
File Type Purpose
tdpsetup.prm This file contains the actual list of remote Station information.
tdpapoll.prm This file contains the start time for the autopoll groups in TDP. (If this
file is not selected for import, all autopoll groups will have a start time of
midnight.)
tdplset.prm This file contains the list of local (or portable) Station information.
tdpprog.prm This file contains the direct connection settings (PC Com port and baud
rate) used to communicate with the portable Stations in TDP. (If this file
is not selected for import, all local Stations will have their connection
parameters set to com port = 1, baud rate = 19200)

238 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using the TDP Import Wizard

Wizard Review Screen

The last screen of the TDP Import wizard is a review of all of your selections from the
previous screens. At the top is a listing of the file(s) selected for import and below that
is the full path and name of the TDP Import log file.
The log file is named using the following convention:
“TDP Import Log MM-DD-YY hhmm.txt”
“MM” = the month number
“DD” = the day of the month
“YY” = the last two digits of the year
“hh” = the hour (using military time)
“mm” = the minute

Note The date and time used for the log file name are taken from the time the file is
generated. This avoids the accidental overwriting of an existing log file.

Figure 76 – Review of TDP Import settings

Files to be imported — This list contains the selected files to be imported. If a file
you want to import is not displayed here, click the Back command button, then click
the Add File(s) command button to locate and include the file.
Import saved as — This field indicates the folder and name of the file that will be
assigned to your import after you click the Finish command button. To edit the folder
where the import will be stored, click the Back command button two times, on the Set
TDP and log directories window, click the Browse command button by the Log file
directory field. Select the folder you want the import stored in, then click the OK
command button.

TOPS Operating Manual 239

Chapter 17 — TOPS Add-in: TDP Station Import

Finish wizard — Click this button to begin the import process. If you want to cancel
the import, do so by clicking the Cancel command button on the progress bar while it
is visible.
Once you have completed your selection of data to be imported, click the Finish
command button to begin processing. If you want to cancel the import, do so by
clicking the Cancel command button on the progress bar while it is visible.

Important If you cancel during the import process, all the Stations
read prior to aborting will have already been imported
into your database.

240 TOPS Operating Manual

 Processing the selected files

PROCESSING THE SELECTED FILES

Once you have completed your selection of data to be imported, click the Finish
command button on the TDP Import Wizard to begin the processing. If you want to
cancel the import, do so by clicking the Cancel command button on the progress bar
while it is visible.

Important If you cancel during the import process, all the Stations
read prior to aborting will have already been imported into
your database.

Import Review Screen

After all of the selected files have been imported into TOPS, the TDP Station Import
Log window is displayed. This screen includes the contents of the log file, as well as
the location and name of the log.

Figure 77 – Import Review screen

Printing the Log: You may print the log file from this window by clicking the Print
command button.
Navigating the Review: If there is more than one page in the log review window,
move through them by clicking the Next and Prev command buttons.

TOPS Operating Manual 241

Chapter 17 — TOPS Add-in: TDP Station Import

Contents of the Station Import Log

The log file contains the following information:

The header contains a list of the type of information logged, the types of
warnings that may appear, and the selected files for import.
The body of the log file contains a block of information for each Station file
imported in the following format:
Name of the Station file
List of Stations with warnings
Number of Stations imported into TOPS
At the end is a total of how many Station files have been Imported.

Any Station which has encountered an issue will appear as follows:

“Seq 006 SiteID “DDDDDDDDDDD” Station “GGGGGGGGGGGG” (the Seq =
sequence number from TDP)
Followed by one or more of these warnings:
Warning: “Station not imported, it already exists in the TOPS database.”
The TDP Import will not overwrite an existing Station in the TOPS database. This
warning will allow you to refer back to the TDP Station file to determine what to do to
correct the problem.

Warning Station not Imported

Following is an example of a Station entry with the "Not Imported" warning:
Seq 002 SiteID: "DuplicateRem" Station: "DuplicateRem"
was not imported, Station already exists in the database.
Warning: “Check the telephone number for this Station.”
If this warning is issued, the telephone number may not have been stored in TDP in a
format that can be dialed. Since TOPS uses the windows telephony, the specific
modem commands entered in TDP on a per Station basis are not used in TOPS.
Thus, they will be discarded.

Warning Check Telephone Number

The following Station entry has the "Check telephone number" warning:
Seq 004 SiteID: "000400000000" Station: "000400000000"
Check telephone number for this Station.
Warning; “This Station has _N recorders associated with it…”

242 TOPS Operating Manual

 Processing the selected files

A multiplexed site in TDP is represented by a single Station with the number of

recorders set greater than 1. In TOPS, a different STATION represents each
recorder at a multiplexed SITE. One of these Stations will be imported into TOPS as a
group of Stations (1 for each recorder). The Station Number will have “_N” appended
to the end where “N” represents the unit number. Each Tops Station will have the
same telephone number with the ComID set to the unit number.

Warning Station Multiplexed

Following is an example of a Station entry with the multiplex warning:
Seq 003 SiteID: "Multiplex_10" Station: "Multiplex_10"
This Station has 2 recorders associated with it.
It was imported as the following 2 Stations:
Station : "Multiplex__1" SiteID: "Multiplex_10"
Station : "Multiplex__2" SiteID: "Multiplex_10"

After You Import

Once the import is complete, there are some basic checks to perform to ensure that
the data was properly converted.
Sort the TOPS Station grid by “Station Name” by clicking on that column’s header.
The TDP sequence number is written to this field in TOPS to allow easier validation
with the data in TDP.
Confirm telephone numbers. Check the telephone numbers for all Stations that
received this warning in the log by comparing the TOPS Station’s connection
parameters with those in TDP.
Confirm Site ID and Station Number. For remote Stations, contact each Station via
the Station grid by selecting “ADR Commander” from the context menu. In the ADR
Commander, select the “Control Panel” screen and navigate to “Check”, then “Check
Setup” and confirm that the Station Number and Site ID match those in TOPS. For a
detailed discussion of why this should be completed, refer to the section titled “TOPS
versus TDP Stations” on page .

TOPS Operating Manual 243

Chapter 17 — TOPS Add-in: TDP Station Import

244 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 18 — TOPS Add-in:
ADR Class Tree Editor

This chapter describes the ADR Class Tree Editor module for TOPS and explains how to use
it. The following topics are discussed in detail in this chapter:

• An introduction to the Class Tree Editor, on page 246.

• Using the interface, on page 248.
• Editing a class tree, on page 253.
• Managing class trees, on page 255.
• Configuring the operation of the tree editor, on page 256.

TOPS Operating Manual 245

Chapter 18 — TOPS Add-in: ADR Class Tree Editor

OVERVIEW
A classification tree is an advanced way of determining what type of vehicle has
crossed the ADR’s sensors. Unlike a simple table, where there is a rigorously defined
set of parameters, a class tree is implemented as a series of “test and branch”
operations. This makes it possible to create classification schemes that would be
difficult, or impossible, for a lookup table. Class trees can also be optimized so they
require less system resources than the equivalent table.
For ease of use, this editor makes some assumptions about the classification
scheme. It is anticipated these assumptions will be accurate for the vast majority of
users. In the unlikely event you need to do something special that this application
does not support, the Advanced ADR Setup Editor will allow you to define a custom
classification sequence.
The main interface of the ADR’s Classification Tree Editor is shown below.

Figure 78 – ADR Class Tree Editor window

246 TOPS Operating Manual

 Overview

Launching the Class Tree Editor

The TOPS Class Tree Editor can be opened in a couple of ways.

Launching the Class Tree Editor from Windows

1. Open the Start menu and choose Programs.
2. Open the Peek group and select ADR Class Editor.
3. When the program prompts you, provide a user name and password.

Launching the Class Tree Editor from TOPS

1. Within TOPS, from either the Select Station, Select Study, or Message Log
views, go to the Tools menu and select the Class Tree Editor command.
2. When the program prompts you, provide a user name and password.
In either case, you will next be presented with the ADR Class Tree Editor window.

TOPS Operating Manual 247

Chapter 18 — TOPS Add-in: ADR Class Tree Editor

USING THE CLASS TREE EDITOR INTERFACE

The main interface of the ADR’s Classification Tree Editor is shown below.

Figure 79 – Class Tree Editor window

Tree Name — The name of the tree (which appears on the ADR’s user interface and
in all the data files recorded using that tree). The name is limited to a maximum of 8
characters in length.
Description — This is used to hold a short description of the class tree. It will appear
on the ADR’s user interface when the class tree is loaded.
Class tree information — This area holds information about the classes that have
been defined. There is one folder for each number of axles (e.g. 1 through 14
inclusive, together with a special entry for more than 14 axles.) Within that folder is a
default class which will be given to vehicles with that number of axles. If there are any
vehicle definitions for vehicles with that many axles they will also appear within that
folder.
Add button — Click this button to add a new vehicle definition to this tree.
Delete button — Click this button to remove a vehicle definition from this tree.

248 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using the Class Tree Editor Interface

Menus

File Menu
The File menu is the one holding all operations relating to file based operations. Click
on the item you are interested in on the image below.

Figure 80 – File menu

Open
Select this and the Open dialog box is displayed for you to select a file to open.

Save
Select this to save the current settings to a file, using the original filename. You will be
prompted to confirm if you want to overwrite the original file.

Save As
Select this to save the current settings to a file. You will be prompted for the name of
the file to save to, and asked to confirm the operation if you are overwriting a file that
already exists.

Upload
If the (optional) Data Transfer module is loaded on your machine, if you select this,
the system will send the current settings to the default media of the remote unit.

Print Definitions
Select this to print a list containing all the currently defined vehicle types.

Exit
Select this to close the Classification Tree Editor.

TOPS Operating Manual 249

Chapter 18 — TOPS Add-in: ADR Class Tree Editor

Definition Menu
The definition menu consists of items concerning the manipulation of the class tree
definitions. Click on the option you want explained.

Figure 81 – Definition menu of the Class Tree Editor

Add Vehicle Definition

Used to create a new class of vehicles within the current class tree.

Delete Vehicle Definition

Deletes the vehicle class that is currently selected in the Class Tree Editor window.

Edit
Opens the class editing window and displays the class that is currently selected in the
main window.

Options Menu
The options menu contains options associated with the class tree editor. Click on the
illustration below for more information.

Figure 82 – Options menu of the Class Tree Editor

250 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using the Class Tree Editor Interface

Feet/Meters
Toggles the screens in the Class Tree Editor between using feet and meters when
displaying lengths.

KIPS/Tonnes
Toggles the screens in the Class Tree Editor between using Kilo-pounds (1000s of
pounds) or metric tonnes when measuring weights.

Load last file on startup

If this menu option has a check next to it, whenever you start the ADR Class Tree
Editor, it will automatically load the last edited file.

Help Menu
This menu option will let you access helpful information about the application.

Figure 83 – Help menu of the Class Tree Editor

About
This menu option will display information about the application including items such
as program version number, serial number, etc.

TOPS Operating Manual 251

Chapter 18 — TOPS Add-in: ADR Class Tree Editor

Using the Vehicle Definition Window

The Vehicle Definition Window is opened whenever a new classification is created, or
when an existing classification is edited.

Figure 84 – Vehicle Definition window

The following controls are available on the five tabs in this window:
Class vehicle belongs to — Select the Class this vehicle belongs to by clicking the
up and down arrows in this field.
Number of axles — Select the number of axles the vehicle has by clicking the up
and down arrows in this field.
To define the vehicles for the Class and Number of Axles indicated above, you may
check one or more of the boxes at the bottom of the General Tab. As you check a
box, the window will switch to the tab where you can input detail data.
Axle Spacings – There is one set of minimum/maximum information for each inter-
axle spacing (in this case there are two axles, so there is only a single spacing). You
may enter the minimum and maximum values for the inter-axle spacing which must
be met before a vehicle can be considered part of this vehicle class. This box is
checked by default.
Axle Weights – There is one set of weight data per axle. Values may be entered to
indicate the weight range each axle must fall into for the vehicle to be considered part
of this class.
Length (from loop sensors) – You may enter the minimum and maximum values for
magnetic vehicle length (i.e. measured using loops). The value determined by the
ADR for vehicle length must fall between the minimum and maximum values for the
vehicle to be considered part of this class.
Gross Weight – You may enter the minimum and maximum values for gross vehicle
weight. A vehicle will only be considered part of the class defined if its gross weight
falls between these two values.

252 TOPS Operating Manual

 Editing a Class Tree

EDITING A CLASS TREE

Adding a Vehicle Definition

1. Click the Add command button.

Or

Open the Definition menu and select Add Vehicle Definition. The Edit Vehicle
Definition dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the Class this vehicle belongs to by clicking the up and down arrows in
this field.
3. Select the number of axles the vehicle has by clicking the up and down
arrows in this field.
4. The check box list indicates what items will be verified when determining if the
vehicle belongs to this class. Insert a check in the appropriate boxes that will
determine this class.
5. Notice as a check is inserted into the defining check boxes, a tab for each is
inserted. The Axle Spacings box is checked by default. Select the Axle
Spacing Tab.
6. There is one set of minimum/maximum information for each inter-axle spacing
(in this case there are two axles, so there is only a single spacing). Enter the
minimum and maximum values for the inter-axle spacing which must be met
before a vehicle can be considered part of this vehicle class. If the number of
axles is incorrect, click the General Tab and increase the number.
7. If axle weights are a defining factor, click the Axle Weights Tab. There is one
set of weight data per axle. The values in these boxes indicate the weight
range each axle must fall into for the vehicle to be considered part of this class.
8. If the length of the vehicle is a defining factor, click the Length Tab. Enter the
minimum and maximum values for magnetic vehicle length (i.e. measured
using loops). The value determined by the ADR for vehicle length must fall
between the minimum and maximum values for the vehicle to be considered
part of this class.
9. If the gross weight of the vehicle is a defining factor, click the Gross Weight
Tab. Enter the minimum and maximum values for gross vehicle weight. A
vehicle will only be considered part of the class defined if its gross weight falls
between these two values.
10. Click the OK command button.

TOPS Operating Manual 253

Chapter 18 — TOPS Add-in: ADR Class Tree Editor

Editing a Vehicle Definition

1. Select the Vehicle defined in the tree view that you want to update.
2. Open the Definition menu and select Edit.
3. The current vehicle data is displayed on the Edit Vehicle Definition dialog box.
Make the necessary changes to the data displayed.
4. Click the OK command button.

Deleting a Vehicle Definition

1. Select a Vehicle defined in the tree view that you want to remove.
2. Click the Delete command button.
Or
1. Open the Definition menu and select Delete Vehicle Definition from the drop-
down menu.
The currently selected vehicle definition is deleted. You cannot delete a “default”
definition.

254 TOPS Operating Manual

 Managing Class Trees

MANAGING CLASS TREES

Saving Classification Data

Once you have completed updating the Classification information, you must save the
information.
1. Click the Save command button.
Or
1. Select File from the menu. Select Save from the drop-down menu.
2. The current settings are saved using the original file name.

Saving Classification Data with a New Name

Once you have completed updating the Classification information, you must save the
information.
1. Select File from the menu.
2. Select Save As from the drop-down menu. The Save As dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select the folder you want to save the data in from the drop-down list at the
top of the dialog.
4. Enter the new file name in the field labeled File Name.
5. Click the Save command button.

Uploading Classification Data

If the (optional) Data Transfer module is loaded on your machine, the system can
send the current settings to the default media of the remote unit.
1. Click the Upload command button.
Or
1. Select File from the menu. Select Upload from the drop-down menu.

Printing Classification Definitions

To print a list containing all the currently defined vehicle types:
1. Select File from the menu.
2. Select Print Definitions from the drop-down menu.

Updating a Trees Name and Description

1. Open the ADR Classification you want to work with.

TOPS Operating Manual 255

Chapter 18 — TOPS Add-in: ADR Class Tree Editor

2. Highlight the Tree Name. Type the new name. The field will contain a
maximum of 8 characters.
3. Highlight the Description. Type the new description. This field will contain a
maximum of 20 characters.

CONFIGURING THE TREE EDITOR

Setting the Default Method of Measurement

1. Select the Options menu.
2. Select either Feet or Meters from the drop-down menu.

Setting the Default Method of Weight

1. Select the Options menu.
2. Select either KIPS or Tonnes from the drop-down menu.

Selecting Feet or Meters for Length Measurements

If Feet (on the Options menu) has a check next to it, the default method of measuring
length is by feet. The alternative is to measure by Meter.
If Meters has a check next to it, the default method of measuring length is by meters.
The alternative is to measure by Feet.

Selecting KIPS or Tonnes for Weight Measurements

If KIPS (on the Options menu) has a check next to it, the default method of
measuring weight is by KIPS, or thousands of pounds (kilo-pounds). The alternative
is to measure by Tonnes.
If Tonnes has a check next to it, the default method of measuring weight is by metric
tons.

256 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 19 — TOPS Add-In: ADR
Study Setup Wizard

This chapter describes the ADR Study Setup Wizard add-in for TOPS and how to use it to
create ADR setup files. The following topics are discussed in detail in this chapter:

• An introduction to the ADR Study Setup Wizard, on page 258.

• How to use the wizard, on page 259.

TOPS Operating Manual 257

Chapter 19 — TOPS Add-In: ADR Study Setup Wizard

OVERVIEW
The ADR Study Setup Wizard is an optional Add-in module for TOPS that assists in
the creation of ADR setup files. It asks a series of questions about the ADR unit and
the particulars of the study to be performed by the unit, and then creates a set of
setup files appropriate for the task. It will generate files for ADR-1000, 2000 and 3000
units, and their Plus versions, but not for ADR-750, ADR-4000 or ADR-6000 devices.

Launching the ADR Study Setup Wizard

The ADR Study Setup Wizard can be started from any of the screens in TOPS.
1. Open the Tools menu and select ADR Setup Wizard from the bottom of the
menu.
2. Start by selecting the type of ADR that will receive the setup files.
3. Follow the Wizard's onscreen directions from there.

258 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using the ADR Study Setup Wizard

USING THE ADR STUDY SETUP WIZARD

The ADR Study Setup Add-in helps the operator create setup files by walking the
user through the setup process. This is done using a Wizard. The flow of this setup
creation process is shown here:

Figure 85 – Flowchart of the ADR Study Setup Wizard

Selecting an ADR Type

The first window of the Setup Wizard is used to define the type of unit that the setup
files will be used in. Select either an ADR-1000, an ADR-2000, or an ADR-3000.
Then select the number of Internal Tube sensors and Piezo sensors installed in the
device. Note that this is not the same as the add-in sensor cards. You'll be able to
configure those on the next screen.

Selecting the Number of Detectors

Use this screen to enter how many additional sensor boards are installed in the ADR
unit. Use the up and down arrows to indicate the number of each type of board that
are installed.

TOPS Operating Manual 259

Chapter 19 — TOPS Add-In: ADR Study Setup Wizard

Setting a Site ID and Station Number

Enter an alphanumeric string to indicate the location (Site ID) and which station this
ADR is going to assume in the field. The Site ID should indicate the location in an
easy-to-understand manner, and the station number can be used to indicate which
ADR is which, if more than one are installed at a given site.
The two 'Use ... as per unit' check boxes tell the wizard to keep the current setting
that is stored in the ADR. If checked, the associated text entry field won't accept any
text.

Selecting an Array Type

From here on out, the wizard uses your responses to determine what questions need
to be asked. The list of array types that are available on this screen depends on what
detectors you previously said are installed in the ADR.
Select the type of array that will be used to perform this particular traffic study. If the
array type that is desired does not appear on this screen, the previous screens may
not have all of the sensor types that you need. If that's the case, use the Back button
to change those settings.

Specifying Study Details

These screens are variable based on which type of sensor and array study is being
created. They walk you through the exact information that is required for this type of
study, avoiding unnecessary details. This is where the exact study parameters, such
as bin counts (for binned files), vehicle finish method, recording intervals and
duration, are set.

Setting a Study Name and Filename

The Description of a study is optional, however you must define a file name in the
bottom field here or the Wizard will not allow you to finish the setup. The description
text can be any text up to 20 characters and can include spaces and punctuation.
Description text will display on the ADRs screen (if it has one), within the TOPS Study
Configuration module, and also in the Select Study view of TOPS itself.
The file name should be a valid ADR file name, which means that it can have up to 8
characters (no spaces, no punctuation except underscores ('_'). By default, the file is
created in the <TOPS_install_directory>\Setup folder. It is automatically saved with
the .STP file extension, so you do not need to add '.STP' to the file name.
If you wish to save the file to a different location on your hard drive or network, use
the Browse button.
Note: The Study Setup Wizard will accept any valid Windows file name in this field,
meaning up to 255 characters long and including spaces. If you do this, when you
attempt to transmit the setup file to an ADR, the Data Transfer module will ask you to

260 TOPS Operating Manual

 Using the ADR Study Setup Wizard

rename the file to meet the more stringent ADR file name requirements before it is
sent.

Completing the Setup File

When you get to the last screen in the ADR Study Setup Wizard, you have the option
to:

Exit the Wizard (the setup file has already been saved to disk)
Go back to the start of the Wizard to create another setup file.

Note The option to load the setup file to a locally connected ADR does
not function at this time. Instead, use the Data Transfer module of
ADR Commander to perform this task.

TOPS Operating Manual 261

Chapter 19 — TOPS Add-In: ADR Study Setup Wizard

262 TOPS Operating Manual

 Chapter 20 — Troubleshooting

This chapter describes some common troubleshooting situations in TOPS. The following topics
are discussed in detail in this chapter:

• Dealing with TOPS error messages, on page 264.

• Using the TOPS Message Log, on page 265.
• Typical TOPS error conditions and workarounds, on page 267.

TOPS Operating Manual 263

Chapter 20 — Troubleshooting

TOPS ERROR MESSAGES

Occasionally, while working with TOPS, you may encounter an error window that
asks you to enter information about what caused the error. This is an example:

Figure 86 – TOPS Program Error window

Quixote Traffic is constantly working to make the TOPS software as stable as
possible, although it can be tricky to ensure this since the data retrieved into TOPS
can sometimes be corrupted (the most common cause of such errors.) If you do see
this error message, you are urged to type in as much detail as possible about what
you were doing at the time. This is especially true if you encounter the problem more
than once. In particular, make note of what data you were using, what module caused
the error, and anything special about the situation.
For instructions on how to send this error message to Quixote, see the instructions
below.

Sending an Error File to Quixote Traffic

1. Locate the error log file (ERROR.LOG). It's stored in the normal TOPS
directory along with the application. If you installed to the default location, it
can be found in the C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic\TOPS folder.
2. Email the error log file to your Quixote customer service department at
[email protected]. They'll make sure the problem is noted and
details will be given to the TOPS software team.

Note If the error resulted from an attempt to generate a report or an

export, please also email the data file that was involved along
with the ERROR.LOG file.

3. Request a PR number (if one isn't immediately given to you.) This will help you
track the problem and find out when it is fixed.

264 TOPS Operating Manual

 Understanding the TOPS Message Log

UNDERSTANDING THE TOPS MESSAGE LOG

TOPS maintains a list of all messages for a session in its message log. This list
could contain the following types of messages:
Message Type Occasion where it may be used
Informational (Files were imported…)
Log (Compact & repair database successful…)
Warning (File not imported…)
Error (Files could not be imported…)

Figure 87 – Message Log window

Type of Message — This column contains the type of message in this list.
Note: If the message is a blue warning or red error message, the log will
automatically be displayed.
From — This column contains the name of the module that sent the message.
Arrived — This column contains the time and date that the message was sent.
Message — This column contains the text description of the action that occurred.
Help Available — If there is a help topic for a message, this column will be checked.
To view that topic, select the message and click the Help command button or press
<F1> to launch on-line help.

Viewing a Message Log

1. Select Window from the menu bar.
2. Select Message Log from the drop-down menu. The Message Log screen is
displayed.

TOPS Operating Manual 265

Chapter 20 — Troubleshooting

Note If there is a help topic for a displayed message, there will be a

check in the box under the column labeled "Help Available". To
view the help topic, select the message, and click the Help
command Button at the bottom of the screen.

3. To exit the Message Log, click the X in the upper right corner of the window.
The system will return you to the Data Explorer.

Tip Click the Message Log icon to access the information quickly. If
the icon is disabled, there are no messages.

266 TOPS Operating Manual

 Some Typical Error Conditions

SOME TYPICAL ERROR CONDITIONS

These errors are by no means a comprehensive listing, however they are the errors
that are encountered most frequently by TOPS users.

Error-Check Connection
Once you have connected the ADR cable to the computer to download data, you may
see an error indicating the data cannot be transferred because a connection cannot
be made. If this error appears:
1. Unplug the cable from both the ADR and the computer.
2. Plug them both back in.
3. Download the data with TOPS.
If the Error appears again, contact your Administrator.

Overlapping Data
There is a small chance that you may find two Studies at the same Station and site ID
that overlap some or all of their intervals of data. Programming two different recorders
with the same site ID and Station number would most likely cause this.
When this problem is encountered, TOPS will issue a warning but proceed with the
processing of the data. When TOPS gets to the overlapping Study, any redundant
intervals of data will not be included in the output. To correct this problem, determine
which Study has the wrong site ID and Station number. Then complete this
procedure:
1. Open the Data Explorer -- Select Station View.
2. Click the Next command button. The Data Explorer - Study View tab is
displayed. (If the Calendar View is displayed, click the Study View tab).
3. Select the Study in the Study grid with the incorrect data.
4. Click the right mouse button. A popup menu appears.
5. Select Change Study’s Station. The Change Station dialog box is displayed.
6. Select an existing Site ID from the drop-down list, or enter a new site identifier.
This field will contain up to 12 characters.
7. Select an existing Station Number from the drop-down list, or enter in a new
Station number. This field will contain up to 12 characters.
8. Click the OK command button.
9. If you added a new Station, a popup window will appear asking if you want to
add the new Station. Click the OK command button.

TOPS Operating Manual 267

Chapter 20 — Troubleshooting

Report Headings are Not What I Expected

Report Headings are automatically inserted. The system allows you to modify row
labels and column headings in some cases.

Printed Report is Missing Characters

When a printed report is missing characters, this is an indication that there is a
problem with the printer driver.
To determine if your computer is using the correct printer driver, preview the
document before you print:
1. After the report is generated, select File from the menu.
2. Select Print Preview from the drop-down menu. The report is now displayed
on your monitor. If there are no characters missing from your report in the print
preview screen, the report is being passed to the printer driver correctly. Verify
you are using the correct driver for the printer:
3. Select File from the menu.
4. Select Print from the drop-down menu. The Print dialog box appears. Ensure
the correct printer name is selected in the drop-down combo box. Although
you can use the driver for the HP LaserJet 4 on an HP LaserJet 5 printer,
certain reports and graphics may not print correctly.
If you are using the correct printer driver, contact the printer manufacturer to
determine if there is a more recent printer driver available.

Printed Report Header is Too Close to the Data

There is a known Windows issue when printing TOPS reports to some printers, even
if the correct print driver is installed. The report will print, but the header of the first
sheet may be printing too closely to the report data. Sometimes the header and data
may even overlap. There are several things that can be done to resolve the problem:

Modifying the Layout of the Header

One possible way to fix this issue is to add spacing directly into the header. To edit
the header for your report, open the Options window for the report and then click the
Header button. When the Header Editor window appears, modify the layout, and
particularly for this problem, try to add one or more {Spacers} at the bottom of the
header. This should move it away from the report data on the printed page. Select OK
twice to close the Header Editor and Options windows. Try printing the report again.

Trying a Different Font or Font Size

Another thing that may correct the problem on your printer is to change the font or the
size of the font that is used to print reports. To change the font settings for reports, go
to the View menu and open the Options window. On the Reports tab, select a

268 TOPS Operating Manual

 Some Typical Error Conditions

different font and/or size. TrueType fonts usually cause fewer problems than any
other font type. It's also a good idea not to use a font size smaller than 8 point.

Directions Within Report are Incorrect

If the direction(s) or lane(s) for one or more channels are incorrect in a report, you
must update the directional information. Before you edit information,

confirm that the site layout is correct

confirm that the Study's direction information has been properly set up
if the report is on binned data, confirm that the channel map is correct
if the report is on PVR data, confirm that the array map is correct

Unable to Generate a PVR Report

If you are attempting to generate a report based on PVR data, the data files that were
imported into TOPS must not be moved after they are imported. The reason for this is
that PVR data files are extremely large, so TOPS does not copy the data into its own
database . . . it merely makes a reference to them.
So if the files are moved after the import, although TOPS still lists the studies in its
screens, it no longer has access to the actual data. This will commonly only show up
to the operator if she or he attempts to generate an export or a report from the data.
You will either need to re-import the data, or move the files back to the location from
which they were originally imported.
If you choose to re-import, make sure that you first delete these studies from the
TOPS study screen, otherwise the application will see that the studies were 'already
imported' and will not actually make references to the new data location.

TOPS Operating Manual 269

Chapter 20 — Troubleshooting

270 TOPS Operating Manual

 Glossary

Abbreviated Direction - This option has the direction in a shortened format. [Ex.
“Lane 1 (N)”]
Allowing edit — Check this box if you want the ability to edit your report while it’s
displayed on your screen.
Array — An array is one sensor or a group of sensors that work together to
determine information about the vehicles passing over them. An array can span one
or more Lanes, depending on array type. Each array will assign a Flow number to any
vehicles detected upon it. Some arrays, the single loop or single axle arrays, can
only determine a single flow. Others can determine more, such as the Tube-and-a-
half or two tube classification arrays.
Array number — An Array Number is an absolute number for a Study.
Automatic Data Recorder — An Automatic Data Recorder (ADR) is a data collection
device used in the traffic industry.
Baud Rate — A baud rate is the maximum number of changes that can occur per
second in the electrical state of a communications circuit. Baud Rates are usually
measured in bits per second (bps). Select the Baud Rate your system uses from the
drop-down list.
Bin Type — There are numerous types of speed bins: channel, speed, class, length,
or weight.
Change Study's Station — Select this from the menu to display the Change Station
dialog box.
Channel — A Channel is a particular group of one or more flows (Examples: “All
Northbound vehicles”, “All vehicles passing over array 1”, or “Vehicles going
Eastbound over Array 3”) It is important for the user to ensure that the data collection
equipment is configured in such a way that the appropriate channel information is

TOPS Operating Manual 271

Glossary

produced. Once the data from several flows has been summated into a channel, it is
impossible to accurately determine the information about individual flows.
Channel / Lane Map — Select this from the menu to display the Select Lane dialog
box.
Channel labels — There are four options for how channels will be labeled in TOPS:
Channel Number – This option will use only the channel number as the label for
each channel. (Ex.: Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4)
Combine lanes in same direction — To have the export combine the lanes flowing
in the same direction, check this box.
Comm Port — Select which port will be used to make the local connection (Com 1 or
Com 2) from the drop-down list.
Comms ID — A Quixote ADR or 241 may have a Communication ID enabling more
than one unit attached to a single connection (multi-drop). The default
Communications ID is 1, but it can be edited by clicking the up and down arrows next
to the field displayed. For the Quixote ADR unit, the Communication number may be
from 1 to 32766. For the Quixote 241 unit, the Communication number may be from 1
to 9.
Compact 15 Minute Volume Tab — The options offered to print your report depend
on the Report you selected and the data recorded. Not all options may be available.
Confirm Exit — Check this box to enable a popup window that will confirm you want
to exit TOPS each time.
Confirm filter enabling — If this box is checked, if filters have been used, they will
remain enabled after a session. When TOPS is restarted, a popup window will
appear asking if you want the filtering previously used to be enabled.
Connection Baud Rate — Baud Rate – A baud rate is the maximum number of
changes that can occur per second in the electrical state of a communications circuit.
Baud Rates are usually measured in bits per second (bps). Select the Baud Rate
your system uses from the drop-down list.
Connection Port — Port – Select which port will be used to make the local
connection (Com 1 or Com 2) from the drop-down list. If the selected port is not
found, do you want the system to automatically scan other ports? If so, check this
box.
Daily Volume Tab — The options offered to print your report depend on the Report
you selected and the data recorded. Not all options may be available.
Default Output — Select whether you want either the Report Wizard or Export
Wizard to run by default when you click the Next command button from the Study or
Calendar View.

272 TOPS Operating Manual

 Glossary

Delete — In the Station View, select this from the menu to permanently remove the
selected Station and all of it’s Studies from the database. In the Study View, select
this from the menu to permanently remove the selected Study from the database.
Export File Path — The displayed file path is the default of where your export will be
placed. To change this information, you may either type in the file path, or click the
Browse command button to locate the file folder you want the export stored in.
Export partial days’ data (nonstandard) — If only a part of a day’s data has been
recorded, the information is usually not exported. If you would like this information
exported, check this box.
Flow — When a vehicle crosses an array, it is assigned a flow number for that array.
This is used to indicate additional information about the direction of travel or position
on the road. Some of the simple arrays can only determine that a vehicle passed.
They cannot determine which direction the vehicle was going in or where on the road
surface it appeared. Such arrays include the single loop and single tube arrays. Other
arrays, such as the two tube classification array, can determine what direction the
vehicle was going in (forward or reverse). Such arrays will assign different flow
numbers to the different directions. This is done so it is possible for the User to
configure the unit to either assign the numbers to a single channel (and get the total
number of vehicles which passed), or assign them to separate channels (for example,
Northbound and Southbound). Some arrays can determine position on the road. The
two tube Short-Long configuration is one such array. As in the previous example, two
flow numbers will be assigned - one for vehicles crossing both sensors and one for
vehicles which only cross the long sensor. As before, these can be assigned to
channels to enable the collecting of whatever statistical information required. It is
even possible to get arrays that can determine both lane and direction. The four tube
array (consisting of two tubes stretching over a single lane, and two over a pair of
lanes) can determine both lane and direction and, as such, requires four different flow
values.
Flow / Lane Map — Select this from the menu to display the Array Map Editor dialog
box.
Font — Select the font used in your reports from the available fonts list box.
Font size — Select the size of the font for reports generated.
Full Direction - This option has the direction completely spelled out. [Ex. “Lane 1
(North)”]
Idris connection — The Automatic Data Recorders (ADRs) using Idris technology
require a Username and password to establish a connection. Enter your Username
and Password into these fields. Important--The Username field cannot be left empty.
The password must be at least 5 characters. The following characters are allowed in
the Idris Username and password fields: lower and uppercase letters, numbers 0 – 9,
and punctuation (. ; : ? !). Please note that the comma is not allowed in either field.
Import files after download — With this checked, TOPS will automatically import a
file into the database when it is downloaded from within the software.

TOPS Operating Manual 273

Glossary

Include direction — Checking this box makes the channel labels include the
direction(s) recorded to that channel. Below this check box are two options for how
the directions will be displayed.
Lane — A lane is a physical lane on the road, typically delineated from the rest of the
road with a painted line or physical barrier.
Lane Comment – This option will use the comments entered into the Site Editor for
the lanes as the heading text for the channels. (Ex.: Enter Exit)
Lane Number – This option will use the lane number from the left column of the Site
Editor to label the channels. (Ex.: Lane 1 Lane 2 Lane 3 Lane 4)
Lane Options command button — This option is not available for Daily Volume
Reports.
Length Units — Select whether you want length measured in feet or meters.
Modem — This field is automatically inserted with the Modem installed on your
computer. If you have more than one modem, you may select a different one from
the drop-down list.

Modem Properties command button — Click this button to modify the properties of
your modem. It is recommended that you leave the factory settings that were
automatically installed. Changing the settings for your modem may cause problems
with the way it functions.
Modem telephone number — Enter the country code, area code, and telephone
number of the modem to be dialed in the appropriate fields in this area.
Per Vehicle Record — A Per Vehicle Record (PVR) is one way of recording data -
per vehicle. A PVR Study is generally a very large file since it contains more detail
data than other studies.
Ports to Scan — If you checked the box indicating you would like the to scan the
system if no remote unit is found, check the box(es) of the other ports you want the
system to search.
Printing Options area — Check the “Fit to page” box if you want the entire Report to
be print on one page only. Check the Save Settings box if you want the above
settings retained for future use.
Report Data Interval area — Select in what time periods you would like the report to
print the data.
Report Interval Heading Format area — Select the kind of Heading for the time
periods you would like.
Save Settings — Check this box if you want the above settings retained for future
use.
Session — A session is the time worked in the TOPS program between the time it is
opened and closed.

274 TOPS Operating Manual

 Glossary

Set Location command button — If it is necessary to dial into the system from
different locations, you may need to add dialing properties for each site. Click this
button to add/update Dialing Property information.
Show Intro — Check this box if you want the Data Explorer introduction screen
displayed each time TOPS is started.
Site — A Site is typically used to refer to the physical location of traffic data collection
equipment. Some examples would be “Corner of Route 301 and Smith Road” or “M
25 Junction 14”. The Site and Station information are used to represent a single
piece of data collection equipment. Under some circumstances, “Site” may not specify
a single road or intersection. In such cases, data collected from each station within
the site is used to build a picture of the traffic flow through the site.
Site ID — The current Site ID information from the current database. This data is
informational only.
Speed Units — Select whether you want speed measured in MPH (miles per hour) or
KPH (kilometers per hour).
Speeds to Scan — Select the baud rate speeds that should be used to scan your
system. The five speeds checked by default are the most commonly used.
Station — A Station is a phrase used to distinguish between pieces of data collection
equipment at the same physical location (or “Site”).
Station Number — The current Station Numbers selected from the current database.
This data is informational only.
Station View columns — In the Data Explorer Station View window, there are
numerous columns describing the downloaded station. Most of the data displayed
may be edited: Double-click the row you want to update. The row in edit mode is
displayed in yellow and the text is bold. Make the necessary changes. Press the
Enter key.
Telephone Number — This area contains information about your modem. Area
Code – Select the area code from the drop-down list of your modem’s phone number.
If the area code is not displayed, you may type it into this field. Number – Type the
modem telephone number into this field. Country – Select the country name you are
dialing from. Dialing History – This field contains the history of modem telephone
numbers you have entered into this window.
TMG File Generation area — Select how you want the files separated in this export:
by day, by week, or by month. If you select “week”, you must select which day of the
week you want your week to begin. You have three options for the name of your
export: Have the system prompt you so you can name each exported file. Have the
system automatically name the file for you with a short TMG Standard name
(example: FL01.xxx). Or have the system automatically name the file for you. The
name would include the state, date, and site encoding (example:
MFLSep01_012345_456789.xxx).

TOPS Operating Manual 275

Glossary

TMG Lane ID – This option will use the number in the TMG Lane ID column of the
Site Editor to label the channels. (Ex.: Lane 1 Lane 2 Lane 2 Lane 1)
Totals area — Check the boxes that contain the type of “Total” information you would
like displayed in your report.
Type of Connection — Select the type of connection from the drop-down list (direct
cable or modem) that you will make with the selected Protocol.
Type of Protocol — Select the type of unit from the drop-down list (Peek ADR, Peek
241, or Peek Idris/ADR 6000) that you are connecting to.
Weight Units — Select whether you want weight measured in Kips or metric tons.
Wrap data — In general, wrapping the data is used to compile information to
complete a 24 hour day out of data that does not start and end at midnight. Many
users collect 24 or 48 hour files. When the report is generated, they want either a
one day study (24 hours) or a two day study (48 hours). If the first selected day of
data does not start at midnight, then the missing intervals will be filled in from the
corresponding intervals of the following day. If you recorded 24 hours of data from
11:00 AM until the same time the following day, you can wrap the data from the
second day to complete the first day. Therefore, you’re making a single 24 hour day
out of data from the 2 days recorded. The data from the second day (midnight to
11:00 AM) would be moved back to the same intervals for the previous day that are
empty.

276 TOPS Operating Manual

 Index

Study Configuration ....................................... 188

TDP Station Import ........................................ 234
. ADR Commander
.bin files .....................................................................8 interface........................................................... 163
.prn files .....................................................................8 introduction ..................................................... 162
.pvr files .....................................................................8 starting ............................................................. 162
.stp files......................................................................8 ADR Monitor
interface........................................................... 179
introduction ..................................................... 178
2 support for ADR-6000.................................... 159
241 format files .................................................... 123 ADR monitor module .......................................... 169
ADR not responding ............................................ 175
A ADR products........................................................... 7
ADR Study Setup Wizard
abbreviated direction ............................................. 75 introduction ..................................................... 258
Abbreviated Direction ......................................... 271 ADR type.............................................................. 259
activating ADR-6000
File Backup ..................................................... 219 data transfer properties ................................... 158
add-in downloading a study....................................... 153
ADR Commander ........................................... 162 headings........................................................... 148
Control Panel .................................................. 172 monitoring activity.......................................... 154
add-in controls toolbar......................................... 165 password.......................................................... 139
add-in manager..................................................... 227 retrieving data ................................................. 156
adding support in ADR Monitor ................................ 159
ADR-6000 station to TOPS ........................... 138 ADR-6000 in TOPS
calling card........................................................ 23 introduction ..................................................... 136
modem dial-out location .................................. 21 agency name........................................................... 74
stations to database ........................................... 16 Allowing edit........................................................ 271
study ................................................................ 191 apply to all compatible studies.............................. 60
study to an ADR-6000.................................... 149 apply to all data ...................................................... 54
vehicle definition to a class tree..................... 253 apply to all data in a range..................................... 54
add-ins .................................................................. 134 apply to this study only.......................................... 60
ADR Class Tree Editor .................................. 246 array ...................................................................... 119
ADR Monitor .................................................. 178 Array ..................................................................... 271
ADR Study Setup Wizard .............................. 258 array column......................................................... 180
Autopolling ..................................................... 208 array description..................................................... 60
Data Transfer .................................................. 196 array flow data........................................................ 61
File Backup ..................................................... 218 array map editor ..................................................... 60

TOPS Operating Manual 277

Index

array maps............................................................... 60 calling card..............................................................23

array number........................................................... 60 Change Study's Station ........................................271
Array number........................................................271 changing
array type ..............................................................260 column order......................................................28
ASCII ........................................................................ 8 lane assigned to a channel ................................64
assumptions .............................................................. 1 lane assigned to a flow......................................65
auto answer ............................................................. 25 lane assigned to flow.........................................62
auto-import lane of a channel................................................57
across a network..............................................230 modem dial-out information.............................22
check frequency ..............................................228 report header ......................................................72
delay.................................................................228 row and column headings .................................76
file access requirements..................................229 channel ....................................................................64
file sharing.......................................................230 Channel .................................................................271
handling non-data files ...................................228 channel headings ....................................................76
importance of FileBackup ..............................231 Channel labels.......................................................272
installation .......................................................226 channel map editor .................................................57
local..................................................................230 channel maps ..........................................................57
multiple database environment ......................231 channel number
overview ..........................................................226 report..................................................................75
prompt..............................................................229 Channel Number...................................................272
support for IQData ..........................................229 chosen fields ...........................................................73
automatic data import.............................. 42, 48, 131 class .......................................................................119
Automatic Data Recorder ....................................271 class reports ............................................................79
auto-move .............................................................227 class tree editor .....................................................246
Autopoller .....................................................226, 229 interface ...........................................................248
autopolling ............................................................208 launching..........................................................247
download directory .........................................216 class tree information ...........................................248
Autopolling classed by default .................................................120
configuration ...................................................215 classes........................................................... 108, 118
autopolling group closing
renaming ..........................................................214 database........................................................46, 47
Autopolling modem .............................................215 log file ..............................................................184
available fields........................................................ 73 color coded error logs...........................................265
AW1 ......................................................................119 column headings.....................................................76
axle spacings.........................................................252 columns
axle weights..........................................................252 changing order ...................................................28
axles.......................................................................119 report header fields............................................73
study view..........................................................37
combine class selection........................................118
B Combine lanes in same direction.........................272
backing up a database ............................................ 50 Comm Port............................................................272
backup directory...................................................229 comma-delimited...................................................... 8
backup directory designer ....................................221 comment..................................................................54
base backup directory...........................................222 Comms ID.............................................................272
batch files..............................................................226 communications......................................................18
baud rate.................................................................. 25 Compact 15 Minute Volume Tab........................272
Baud Rate..............................................................271 compact 15-minute volume report ........................99
bin files...................................................................... 8 compacting
moving .............................................................231 database..............................................................50
BIN reports ............................................................. 78 compacting a database ...........................................46
Bin Type ...............................................................271 configuration screens
binned data reports ................................................. 68 PVR reports .....................................................118
configuring
add-ins..............................................................134
C auto-import ......................................................228
calendar view.......................................................... 36 Autopolling......................................................215
calibration factor ..................................................111

278 TOPS Operating Manual

 Index

Data Transfer .................................................. 205 options ............................................................. 205

exit configuration............................................ 130 setting connection properties ......................... 202
field modems..................................................... 25 Data Transfer add-in ............................................ 196
file backup....................................................... 221 Data Transfer module .......................................... 169
polling groups in AutoPolling........................ 209 data transfer properties
station communications.................................... 18 ADR-6000 ....................................................... 158
studies.............................................................. 188 database management ............................................ 47
study details .................................................... 193 database version ..................................................... 51
TOPS ............................................................... 130 date........................................................................ 119
Confirm Exit......................................................... 272 date and time ........................................................ 209
Confirm filter enabling ........................................ 272 day combination................................................... 118
connecting default font for reports........................................... 74
ADR-6000 ....................................................... 137 default local ............................................................ 20
existing ADR-6000......................................... 141 default modem........................................................ 20
stations............................................................... 18 Default Output...................................................... 272
Connection Baud Rate......................................... 272 default report wizard.............................................. 71
Connection Port ................................................... 272 default units..................................................108, 118
connection properties default wizard....................................................... 131
ADR Commander ........................................... 166 Delete.................................................................... 273
connection toolbar................................................ 164 deleting
control panel......................................................... 169 stations............................................................... 17
Control Panel study...................................................38, 191, 193
activating ......................................................... 173 vehicle defnition ............................................. 254
introduction ..................................................... 172 designing a backup directory structure............... 222
conversion of a database........................................ 51 details screen ........................................................ 190
copy all stations...................................................... 51 direct connection properties
copy only stations with data .................................. 51 Data Transfer................................................... 203
creating direction .................................................................. 54
ADR-6000 study............................................. 142 reports................................................................ 75
autopolling group............................................ 211 directions within report are incorrect.................. 269
export file ........................................................ 123 directory contents................................................... 47
log file.............................................................. 184 disabling
new database ............................................... 46, 47 Autopolling ..................................................... 208
PVR reports..................................................... 107 file backup....................................................... 220
reports................................................................ 68 display settings .............................................108, 118
customer service........................................................2 documentation .......................................................... 1
download .................................................................. 7
download directory .............................................. 216
D downloading
D 122 study to ADR-6000......................................... 153
daily class report .................................................... 79 DTR ........................................................................ 25
daily gap report ...................................................... 83 dual list.................................................................. 222
daily headway report.............................................. 87
daily length report .................................................. 91
daily speed report................................................... 95 E
daily volume report.............................................. 101 echo......................................................................... 25
Daily Volume Tab ............................................... 272 editing
data array flow within a date range ......................... 62
new ................................................................ 8, 49 channels within a data range ............................ 58
session ........................................................... 8, 49 class tree .......................................................... 253
data description ...................................................... 37 class trees......................................................... 246
data explorer ........................................................... 36 site layout .......................................................... 54
data import.............................................................. 42 station data ........................................................ 17
data management ................................................... 48 study................................................................. 191
Data Transfer study headings................................................. 193
interface........................................................... 197 vehicle definition ............................................ 254

TOPS Operating Manual 279

Index

email address ........................................................264 flow number ............................................................60

email service............................................................. 2 flowchart of ADR study setup.............................259
enabling Font........................................................................273
Autopolling......................................................208 Font size ................................................................273
file backup .......................................................219 formatting
filters................................................................131 report labels .......................................................74
end date ................................................................... 37 reports ................................................................72
entering formula for PHF ...................................................100
local connection properties............................... 19 frequency of auto-import .....................................228
modem connection properties .......................... 20 full direction............................................................75
error check connection .........................................267 Full Direction........................................................273
error message........................................................265
error messages ......................................................264
ERROR.LOG........................................................264 G
ESAL settings ...............................................108, 122 gap report ................................................................83
ESN .................................................................37, 165 generate
event data view.....................................................183 PRN export ......................................................127
events column .......................................................180 gross ......................................................................122
exit confirmation ..................................................130 gross ESAL ...........................................................120
export ........................................................................ 7 gross vehicle weight .............................................112
file path ............................................................126 gross weight ................................................. 119, 252
options..............................................................124 groups....................................................................209
Export File Path....................................................273 GVW bin limits ....................................................113
Export partial days’ data (nonstandard ...............273 GVW summary report..........................................114
export wizard ..................................................68, 123
exporting data .......................................................123
H
header ................................................................72, 80
F header preview........................................................73
fax number ................................................................ 2 heading limits .......................................................194
field modem configuration .................................... 25 heading type..........................................................193
field selection........................................................119 headings
file access rights for auto-import.........................229 ADR-6000 .......................................................148
File Backup utility................................................218 headway report .......................................................87
file management ...................................................227 hiding
file types.................................................................... 8 introduction screen ..........................................130
filebackup .............................................................227 Highway Capacity Manual 2000.........................100
FileBackup hours of service......................................................... 2
auto-import linkage.........................................231
filter
startup ..............................................................131
I
filter definitions ............................................108, 121 Idris connection ....................................................273
filter types ............................................................... 30 Idris products ........................................................7, 8
filtering Import files after download .................................273
ADR-6000 data ...............................................160 importing
station data......................................................... 49 data .....................................................................42
stations by data .................................................. 30 data automatically .............................................48
stations by text................................................... 29 data manually ....................................................48
filters importing data.......................................................131
examples ......................................................31, 33 importing TDP data ..............................................234
station................................................................. 29 include all vehicles ...............................................120
flexible ..................................................................122 Include direction...................................................274
flow .................................................................65, 119 include graph ........................................................118
Flow ......................................................................273 include/exclude.....................................................120
Flow / Lane Map ..................................................273 individual axle ESALs .........................................119
flow lanes................................................................ 60 individual PVR field selection.............................108
individual PVR records report...108, 109, 110, 111,

280 TOPS Operating Manual

 Index

112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117 load on startup ...................................................... 134
informational message......................................... 265 loading
inserting file backup utility............................................ 219
lane direction information................................ 64 study configuration from disk ........................ 191
installing local as default........................................................ 20
auto-import...................................................... 226 local connection properties.................................... 19
interface local selection
ADR Commander ........................................... 163 ADR Commander ........................................... 166
ADR Monitor .................................................. 179 location ................................................................... 21
class tree editor ............................................... 248 log files ................................................................. 184
Data Transfer .................................................. 197 log message .......................................................... 265
Study Configuration ....................................... 189 Longterm Pavement Performance....................... 125
introduction loop length............................................................ 119
ADR Commander ........................................... 162 LPL ....................................................................... 119
ADR Monitor .................................................. 178 LTPP file naming................................................. 125
ADR Study Setup Wizard .............................. 258
ADR-6000 in TOPS ....................................... 136
Control Panel add-in....................................... 172 M
File Backup utility .......................................... 218 main screen reset .................................................. 175
introduction screen............................................... 130 managing
introduction to TOPS................................................6 add-ins ............................................................. 134
IQdata ................................................................... 226 site layout .......................................................... 54
IQData .................................................................. 229 managing data ........................................................ 48
managing TOPS databases .................................... 46
manual data import ................................................ 48
K measurement units ............................................... 133
key concepts..............................................................7 menus
keyboard operation .............................................. 173 ADR Commander ........................................... 164
class tree editor ............................................... 249
Data Transfer................................................... 198
L message log .......................................................... 265
label format .......................................................... 132 mm .................................................................... 1, 252
labels on reports ..................................................... 74 Modem.................................................................. 274
lag sensor .............................................................. 120 modem as default ................................................... 20
Lane ...................................................................... 274 modem connection properties .......................20, 168
lane assignment ...................................................... 64 Data Transfer................................................... 203
lane combination .................................................. 118 modem dial-out information.................................. 22
lane comment ......................................................... 75 modem dial-out location........................................ 21
Lane Comment ..................................................... 274 Modem Properties command button................... 274
lane direction information ..................................... 64 modem selection
Lane Map.............................................................. 272 ADR Commander ........................................... 166
lane number ...................................................... 54, 75 Modem telephone number ................................... 274
Lane Number........................................................ 274 modifying
lane options ............................................................ 80 agency name...................................................... 74
lane options button................................................. 96 channel headings on a volume report .............. 76
Lane Options command button........................... 274 column headings for a class report .................. 76
lane selection .......................................................... 64 registered user name ......................................... 74
launching report header ..................................................... 72
ADR Commander ........................................... 162 row and column headings................................. 76
ADR Study Setup Wizard .............................. 258 study heading .................................................. 193
class tree editor ............................................... 247 monitor selection table......................................... 179
TOPS to view ADR-6000 .............................. 136 monitoring
length .................................................................... 118 activity of an ADR-6000 ................................ 154
length from loop sensors ..................................... 252 monthly class report............................................... 81
length report ........................................................... 91 monthly gap report ................................................. 85
Length Units......................................................... 274 monthly headway report ........................................ 89
limit information .................................................. 194

TOPS Operating Manual 281

Index

monthly length report............................................. 93 Printing Options area............................................274

monthly speed report.............................................. 98 PRN data files.......................................................123
monthly volume report.........................................103 PRN export of all new data..................................127
mouse operation ...................................................173 PRN files................................................................... 8
moving process....................................................................... 7
study................................................................... 37 processing TDP import files ................................241
multi-dimensional report......................................105 program error window .........................................264
multiple databases prompt before auto-importing .............................229
auto-import ......................................................231 Pt 122
multiple item selection ........................................... 17 purpose of manual .................................................... 1
PVR auto-calibration factor report ......................111
PVR files................................................................... 8
N moving .............................................................231
new data ..............................................................8, 49 PVR hourly GVW report .....................................113
no loops activated.................................................120 PVR reports ....................................................68, 107
no speed ................................................................120 configuration ...................................................118
number of axles ............................................119, 252 PVR weekly GVW report ....................................112
number of detectors..............................................259 PVR weight violations by class report ................116
number of lanes ...................................................... 54 PVR weight violations report ..............................115
PVR weight violations summary report..............117
PVR-ESALs by class by hour report ..................110
O
oeprations..............................................................209
opening Q
database .......................................................46, 47 quad .......................................................................122
options
ADR Commander ...........................................169
options screen .......................................................130 R
overlapping data ...................................................267 recorder ESN ..........................................................37
overview recording dates of site layout changes ..................54
ADR-6000 in TOPS........................................136 reducing visible data ..............................................49
overweight ............................................................121 refreshing
overwrite options..................................................223 sensor/array view ............................................185
registered user name...............................................74
related documents..................................................... 1
P removing
Palm ......................................................................226 autopolling group ............................................213
pavement thickness ..............................................122 renaming
peak hour factor ....................................................100 autopolling group ............................................214
Peek Traffic Customer Service................................ 2 renaming a database ...............................................46
Per Vehicle Record ..............................................274 repairing
per vehicle records ................................................... 8 database..............................................................50
PHF .......................................................................100 repairing a database ................................................46
phone support ........................................................... 2 report
plug-ins .................................................... See add-ins header .................................................................72
Plus products ............................................................ 7 report creation.........................................................68
PocketPC...............................................................226 report data interval .................................................79
polling ...................................................................208 Report Data Interval area .....................................274
polling groups .......................................................209 report headings are not what I expected .............268
Ports to Scan.........................................................274 Report Interval Heading Format area..................274
preview.................................................................... 73 report interval heading formats .............................79
print options............................................................ 77 report labels ..........................................................132
printed report header is too close to the data ......268 report output............................................................69
printed report is missing characters.....................268 report wizard.....................................................68, 71
printing reports
report.................................................................. 69 BIN.....................................................................78
printing options....................................................... 79 class....................................................................79

282 TOPS Operating Manual

 Index

default font ........................................................ 74 time and date poll............................................ 213

default labels..................................................... 74 setting modem
gap ..................................................................... 83 Autopolling ..................................................... 215
headway............................................................. 87 setup files.................................................................. 8
individual PVR records 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, Show Intro ............................................................ 275
113, 114, 115, 116, 117 show new data only.......................................... 29, 49
length ................................................................. 91 show session data only..................................... 29, 49
multi-dimensional........................................... 105 SHRP ID ............................................................... 125
PVR ................................................................. 107 Site ........................................................................ 275
speed.................................................................. 95 site editor .......................................................... 54, 64
volume............................................................... 99 site ID........................................................37, 60, 260
result messages....................................................... 25 Site ID ................................................................... 275
retrieving site layout data........................................................ 54
current study configuration from remote unit191 site number ............................................................. 37
data from ADR-6000...................................... 156 sites ......................................................................... 14
reviewing TDP import log................................... 241 Sn 122
rigid....................................................................... 122 speed .............................................................118, 119
road temperature .................................................. 119 speed report ............................................................ 95
row headings .......................................................... 76 Speed Units........................................................... 275
RSR232................................................................. 203 Speeds to Scan...................................................... 275
start button
ADR Monitor .................................................. 180
S start date.................................................................. 37
save settings.................................................... 80, 108 starting
Save Settings ........................................................ 274 Control Panel................................................... 173
saving TDP Import Wizard ........................................ 235
database ............................................................. 46 Station ................................................................... 275
report ................................................................. 69 station connection properties................................. 19
study configuration to disk............................. 191 station filters..................................................... 29, 49
selected add-in toolbar......................................... 165 station import log ................................................. 242
selected files ........................................................... 47 station number ................................................60, 260
selecting Station Number .................................................... 275
ADR Commander add-in ............................... 169 station view............................................................. 14
ADR type ........................................................ 259 columns ............................................................. 14
data for reports.................................................. 69 Station View columns.......................................... 275
multiple items ................................................... 17 stations .................................................................... 14
sending status ..................................................................... 119
error file to Peek ............................................. 264 status filter ............................................................ 120
study configuration to remote unit................. 192 status filters........................................................... 108
sensor array table ................................................. 181 structural number ................................................. 122
sensor count view................................................. 181 study
sensor events ........................................................ 183 deleting a ........................................................... 38
service numbers.........................................................2 moving a ............................................................ 37
serviceability ........................................................ 122 Study Config module........................................... 169
Session.................................................................. 274 Study Configuration
session data......................................................... 8, 49 interface........................................................... 189
Set Location command button ............................ 275 Study Configuration add-in ................................. 188
setting study details.......................................................... 260
autopolling download directory..................... 216 study filename ...................................................... 260
base backup directory..................................... 222 study filters............................................................. 36
connection properties in Data Transfer ......... 202 study name............................................................ 260
default modem .................................................. 20 study number .......................................................... 37
default wizard ................................................. 131 study view............................................................... 36
local as default .................................................. 20 columns ............................................................. 37
measurement units.......................................... 133 summary button...................................................... 96
report label format .......................................... 132 summary screen

TOPS Operating Manual 283

Index

Study Configuration........................................189 database version ................................................51

site information .................................................55
updating report printing options ............................77
T upload........................................................................ 7
tail-gate vehicle ....................................................120 user name ................................................................74
tandem...................................................................122 user selected
TDP ........................................................................... 7 classes ..............................................................118
TDP parameter file types .....................................238
TDP Station Import add-in ..................................234
technical assistance .................................................. 2 V
telemetry contact ..................................................175 valid/invalid ..........................................................120
Telephone Number ...............................................275 vehicle definition window ...................................252
temperature ...........................................................118 vehicle events .......................................................183
time........................................................................119 vehicle number .....................................................119
time start end ........................................................118 vehicles column ....................................................180
time-interval format .............................................105 vehicles off scale ..................................................120
TMG compliance..................................................123 viewing
TMG file generation.............................................125 message log .....................................................265
TMG File Generation area...................................275 violation filters......................................................108
TMG lane ID ....................................................54, 75 violations filters....................................................120
TMG Lane ID .......................................................276 volume report..........................................................99
toolbar
Data Transfer ...................................................201
toolbars W
ADR Commander ...........................................164 warning message ..................................................265
TOPS watch directory ............................................ 228, 229
error messages.................................................264 watch folder ..........................................................231
TOPS modules.......................................................... 6 WB1 ......................................................................119
TOPS vs TDP .......................................................234 WBL ......................................................................119
totals all channels ................................................... 79 weekly class report .................................................80
totals all classes ...................................................... 79 weekly gap report ...................................................84
Totals area.............................................................276 weekly headway report ..........................................88
totals percent row ................................................... 79 weekly length report...............................................92
totals total row ........................................................ 79 weekly speed report................................................96
tour of TOPS............................................................. 9 weekly volume report...........................................102
traffic data processor ............................................234 weigh-in-motion ...................................................111
Transportation Research Board ...........................100 weight....................................................................118
TRB.......................................................................100 Weight Units.........................................................276
tree name...............................................................248 weight violation....................................................116
triple ......................................................................122 weight violations ..................................................115
troubleshooting wheel imbalance ...................................................122
ADR Control Panel .........................................175 wheel weight.........................................................120
TOPS................................................................264 wheelbase..............................................................119
turning OFF WIM ......................................................................111
station filters...................................................... 31 wizard review screen............................................239
Type of Connection..............................................276 working with array maps .......................................60
Type of Protocol...................................................276 working with channel maps ...................................57
working with lane selection ...................................64
working with studies ..............................................36
U Wrap data ..............................................................276
unable to generate a PVR report..........................269 WW1 .....................................................................120
unbalanced axles ..................................................120
unit status toolbar .................................................165
units.......................................................................133 Z
updating Z-Link ...................................................................226
array flow data................................................... 61

284 TOPS Operating Manual